Home

USER MANUAL - Divelbiss Corporation

1. 37 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects 40 Creating Ladder Diagram nennen nennen nnn nnn nh nnn nnns nnn nnn n nnn 41 Understanding Objects amp esee ei esee nnn nnn nnn nn nnn nnn nnn nnns 41 Creating and Placing Variables ue Ravi ERGO s nde xta nc E 43 T 44 45 Keeping Variable Values on Power 055 48 Placing Objects and Drawing 48 5 m 50 Inserting and Deleting RUNS ipu ph en RE EUR M M ERE 51 Saving EZ LADDER Toolkit Projets end tod 51 Verifying and Compiling Ladder Diagrams 52 BitAddressable Variables 53 Divelbiss Corporation
2. 159 PLC on a Chip Integrated Er FRU REESE SEE 161 PLC 165 Enhanced Baby Bear PLC Models rsen conn iine nno n nnnkma onu AUC 171 Harsh Environment PLC Models reise Uriel c RR nnne 178 merca ol M 193 Solves lt Plug in PLC Mb eR V vasa aS Ems edu deu B ed 197 Micro Bear Controller 4 201 Versatile Base Controller Models nn nnn n nnn nnn 203 Chapter 21 Low Power 204 Low Power Mode 205 Low Power Mode Installation Configuration 11 ee eee lesse 205 Entering Low Power Mod iiis i nlii uad x Ron NE EE ANGUS 207 Waking from Low Power urn UV xu OR C RR cR Ar Rr 207 Chapter 22 Function
3. 69 PM OUDOT BaSIES cuui 69 Configuring PWM in Project Settings xc an EC M 70 Controlling PWM in the Ladder Diagram eene enne nnne nnn 71 Chapter 9 LCD Display 2 73 LCD Display Functionally 74 Configuring the LCD Display in the Project 74 Displaying Messages on the LCD 76 Chapter 10 Keypad enne nnn nnns 79 Keypad FUNCT MAME rc 80 Configuring the Keypad in the Project Settings 80 Getting Data from the SEU Uu GEH su uud cU S DVD RUE Kal U RS KEW CENE S Iu i 82 Chapter 11 Serial Printing eene enne nnn 84 Serial PriBt aacra D
4. sese 41 Creating and Placing 43 CS tr 44 rS 45 Keeping Variable Values on Power 055 48 Placing Objects and Drawing Links eeessseess 48 USING Paste SERRE US 50 Inserting and Deleting 9 51 Saving EZ LADDER Toolkit Projects eee seres 51 Verifying and Compiling Ladder Diagrams 52 Bit Addressable 53 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Creating Ladder Diagram Projects When EZ LADDER Toolkit is opened it will automatically create a new blank project and it s corresponding workspace as shown in Figure 5 1 A new project may be created at any time by choosing New from the File menu EZ EZ Ladder Standard EZ Ladder oy EZ File Edit View Project Reports Window Help tae 085 JMP pa Edit Inst Label pee C Abc O CTU CTUD TP TON TOF Insert Function
5. 209 Object and Function Block nnmnnn 211 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 4 CHAPTER 1 Getting Started This chapter provides detailed information for getting started using the EZ LADDER Tool kit Included in this section are installation instructions activating EZ LADDER Toolkit and instructions on how information in this manual is presented Chapter Contents What s New or Changed in 1 2 2 0 6 How to Use this 7 Installing the EZ LADDER Toolkit sssssse 8 Activating the EZ LADDER Toolkit 10 Installing Additional Copies of EZ LADDER Toolkit 12 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 1 Getting Started What s New or Changed in V1 2 2 0 The following items are new beginning in EZ LADDER Toolkit V1 2 2 0 With the release of EZ LADDER Toolkit V1 2 2 0 the EZ LADDER Toolkit Manual for M Series products is has continued as a a separate manual from the P Series EZ LADDER Toolkit Manual This manual is specifically for M Series PLC on a Chip target programming EZ LADDER Toolkit Separated into two Versions M
6. 103 Using OptiCAN Configuration nn nnn nnn nnns 113 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and nnn 118 SPI Slave SUPPO 119 SPI BUS DEVICES 125 Chapter 16 SSI 138 Synchronous Serial Interface SSI Encoder 139 Slave Sol Encoder aiii 141 Chapter 17 EZ LADDER Toolkit Reports eere 142 EZ LADDER TOSIKIUISSDOFIS 143 Chapter 18 146 Error MOSSIES EE EEE EE E EEE AI 147 Common Ladder Diagram 150 Chapter 19 Analog 152 Analog EET 153 Analog Input Installation Configuration 153 Using Analog Inputs the Ladder Diagram 155 Averaging Analog Input Readings 155 Scaling Analog Input Readings 156 Chapter 20 Hardware
7. it o 4 Insert Function MAV a DIVNUM f P2 Coils Contacts Functions Variables Labels Figure 18 2 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Z 151 CHAPTER 19 Analog Inputs This chapter provides basic information on installing and using analog inputs This chap ter covers standard product and PLC on a ChipTM analog inputs For SPI devices see Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support Chapter Contents Analog Input 153 Analog Input Installation Configuration 153 Using Analog Inputs in the Ladder Diagram Project 155 Averaging Analog Input Readings e ecce 155 Scaling Analog Input Readings e seres eee 156 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 152 Chapter 19 Analog Inputs Analog Input Overview As analog inputs are a common requirement in today s control world EZ LADDER Toolkit provides an easy to use interface to read analog input and then using the built in function blocks act on the analog input val ues Analog inputs provide a digital representation of an analog input signal Analog inputs values are ranged
8. ow Example Circuit Timing Diagram m um i 0 Elapsed Time ao False Off IN mm mm False Off Related Functions TON TP Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 293 Chapter 22 Function Reference TON TON Description IN Q The TON on delay timer time delay on pick up is a programmable timer with a variable turn on time When the input IN input is true the timer begins timing When the elapsed time ET is equal to the preset time PT the output Q energizes goes true When the input IN sees a true to false transition the timer is reset and the output Q is de ener PT ET gized goes false Input Output Connections The TON function block placement requires connections of two input pins IN PT and two output pins Q Type Integer Real Boolean Timer ActiveState OtherDetals ow ow x em S Prop mu pq ET S uu e owe Example Circuit Timing Diagram S Elapsed Time m True On 2i L False Off E False Off Related Functions TOF
9. 7 Coils Contacts Functions Variables i Labels Figure 5 1 Before adding any objects functions or variables to the new workspace the Target must be selected and configured according to the target needs and your program requirements Select your target by choosing Settings from the Project menu See Chapter 4 Configuring Targets and Chapter 20 Hardware Targets for details When configuring your target it is recommended to only install and configure features that are intended to be used Installing unused features degrades performance Understanding Objects amp Variables Ladder diagram projects in EZ LADDER Toolkit are comprised of a combination of objects function blocks variables and links It is important to understand the basic relation of these items These items will be cov ered first generally then in more detail as this chapter progresses Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 41 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Nearly all ladder diagram objects and function blocks rely on variables either as a definition for the object or addition to the function block to provide required data to function properly A variable is a placeholder that represents values that can change A variable can represent any number depending upon its type Variables are an important part of understanding how EZ LADDER uses functions and objects Some ob jects such as
10. Engine Speed at iare Fonti 62 6 o 045 o mm mm 015 o mm 512 DwerspemadToue ew s s 1 os x 513 Actual Engine Torque 1 _ sm cwemGer es s 2 5 sea Selected Gear 8 5 0 1 s26 AcwaGesRao s o 528 Engine 24 015 o mm 529 Engine Speet Poms 62 16 045 o mm 530 Engine 62 16 72 015 o mm mm 531 Engine 1e se 015 o mm mm 532 Engine Speed At High idle Ports 68251 16 120 015 o mm mm Ga o0 s s 10 pm om 7 7 7010007813 OIO 8 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m 0 0 a Engine Intercooler Thermostat Opening More SPNs Next Page Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 250 Chapter 22 Function Reference Ls PON English Units Joral J1939 3 Axis Incline Sensor Specific SPN 65545 Sensitivity Setting as currently configured 65465 Number 0 7 O Most Sensitive 7 Most Sluggish 65546 LED Weight Setting degree per LED Indicator as cur 65465 Number 1 7 rently configured Parameter Group Number Information PGN Description Abbrev Repetition Default Data Rate Priority Length 61443 Electronic Engine Controll
11. ow owej jJ X jJ jo Example Circuit Related Functions ADD SUB DIV Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 264 Chapter 22 Function Reference MUX MUX Description EN The MUX function multiplexes the INx inputs into one output O The number of inputs is specified when the object is placed The output O provides the value of the selected input The value on input K starts at zero for IN1 determines the number of the input that will be present on the output The enable EN must be true for the MUX function to be K enabled Input Output Connections The MUX function block placement requires connections of at least four input pins EN K IN1 132 and two output pints IN worm integer Rest Boolean Timer Active State Other Deis eme Example Circuit Related Functions SEL Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 265 Chapter 22 Function Reference NOT NOT Description EM The NOT function provides a one s complement bit to bit negation of the P input The output O provides the one s complement The enable EN must be true for the NOT function to be enabled P Input Output Connections The NOT function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN P and two output pins Q O worm type integer Real Boo
12. lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Bla Q7 7a a a ya Write Slave Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 122 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support Read Master LO Read Slave 0 s 8 5 JAQ Timing Diagrams amp Waveforms BEGIN END ary SCK ACTIVE HIGH SCK ACTIVE LOW SAMPLE INPUT MOSI CHANGE OUTPUT MISO PIN IF NEXT TRANSFER BEGINS HERE SEL SS INPUT ll tT tl ot ot MSB FIRST MSB BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 LSB MINIMUM 1 2 SCK LSB FIRST LSB BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 5 BIT 6 MSB FOR tT tl tL tL MINIMUM LEADING TIME BEFORE FIRST SCK EDGE tT MINIMUM TRAILING TIME AFTER LAST SCK EDGE tl MINIMUM IDLING TIME BETWEEN TRANSFERS MINIMUM SS HIGH TIME tL tT AND tl ARE REQUIRED READ SEQUENTIAL SCK i MOSI 1 Don t Care gt lt Don t Care LITE i Fg itt MISO ii 0x00 DATA 31 24 DATA 23 16 DATA 15 8 DATA7 0 p lt DATA 31 24 DATA 23 16 DATA 15 8 i a 11 1 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 123 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support WRITE SEQUENTIAL t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t5 t6 11 Pid 1 1 l I 1 0611 I 1 1 Iil 11 I ssi iHi H
13. 180 FG ded RM Ed ERE RAE 181 ale cluypccco P 182 I qu 183 HECAT Cum p 184 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 159 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets gm Ore pap CI M HEG 42 1X ESR HEC HMI 2X E R HEC HMI C210X E R cessere HEC HMI C215X E R eese Ren enn HEC HMI C415X E R PCS cup PCS 1X1 PCS 1X2 POCS ZAU mH PCS 2X1 PCS 2X2 Micro Bear Controller Models ICM MB 100 errem Hmmm nennen ICM MB 110 Versatile Base Controller Models Sg 0 PTT Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 160 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLC on a Chip Integrated Circuits Each PLC on a Chip integrated circuit model support
14. 85 Configuring the Serial Print Feature cciciccsscsccssisinmcesinwaencatewstenastnracnencawenitesecncbumsicscatouuareoataweusdeienuiartecuansusl 85 Printing Data to a Serial Device using a Serial 87 Chapter 12 41939 Networking 89 U 90 Configuring 41939 nennen 90 RECEIVING J1939 Network 92 Chapter 13 Modbus Networking 93 MOODUS SIAVE T 94 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking 99 What S OpPUC AN 100 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 3 Table of Contents Planning the ODUCAN n Dans UNE NN 100 Hardware Requirements amp 100 Ole O92 SPECIE qn S NONE D EO DE 103 Using Controllers on the OptiCAN
15. cernentes nter snos 296 O a 297 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 210 Chapter 22 Function Reference Object and Function Block Basics This chapter provides information on using each of the EZ LADDER Toolkit function blocks and objects For each object or function the symbol diagram information on the inputs and outputs and a description of the function or block operation is provided When applicable truth tables timing diagrams or other functions details are provided This information is to provide basic practices of how each function or object works and is not intended to provide complete applications or uses As this chapter is a reference providing function block and object details on ALL functions available EZ LADDER Toolkit the presence of a function does not guarantee availability of the function on all hardware targets Availability of functions and objects is determined by the hardware target that is configured for the ladder diagram projects Some functions and objects are not available on some targets Refer to the actual hard ware target s data sheet manual or Chapter 20 Hardware Targets for a list of supported functions and objects based on target selection Q It is important to formulate which function blocks may be used in a ladder diagram project and then verify and select the target that supports the desired features and function blocks All objects an
16. EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WARITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 179 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC 200X E R Features
17. Left align the variable within the specified width Default is align right 0 If width is prefixed with O leading zeros are added until the minimum width is reached If 0 and are used together 0 is ignored If O is specified in an integer format the 0 is ignored width precision when using REAL variables Variable Formats This flag is optional Width is the number of characters that will be printed total This flag is optional The precision is the number of digits after the decimal point Variables are formatted based on the variable type The following are supported variable types and their format Jod Signed Integer You Unsigned Integer X Lower Case Hexadecimal O Octal Other Special Characters and Formats To Print Use Boolean or 1 d Examples Format Result OIL d OIL 25 LS1 T LS1 TRUE TEMP 6 2f TEMP 234 12 Related Functions LCD CLEAR X Upper Case Hexadecimal ot Real or Float Variable Job binary To Print Use OFF ON FALSE TRUE Uo T Format Result OIL 04d OIL 0025 LS1 LS1 OFF TEMP 3 f TEMP 234 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 296 Chapter 22 Function Reference LESS THAN lt LESS THAN Description The LESS THAN provides an if less than comparison for the Px inputs The number of in puts is specified when the object is placed The output is true if P1 is less than P2 and P2 is less than P3 and so
18. 261 262 MOD eccessecsecessescsessessecessesuesessesussesaesssessesussesaesesstsaesesststesessesesnsatessteaees 263 EE DE EAE 264 265 KC m 266 NOT EQUAL lt gt 267 OPTICAN NODESTATUS eret tette 268 OPTICAN TXNETMSG entree trente ttes 269 OR 270 X eee eect eee tees eset 271 AVI ee 273 PWM_FREQ ccccsssessccessessesessessesessessesssesaesssessesessessesessesssesateasstsateaeeess 274 REAL eeccssecsccessescsessesucsessesucsessesussesaesssesaesussesaesesstsatsessesesnsseeesesatenesteaee 275 TRIG E 276 io cca eee Seco AE 277 ROR RR 278 gt ected wee 279 280 SERIAL PRINT cessececcessecccessesecsessescsessesuccessesussesaesnesessesussesaeenssesateeee 281 SEIDATE S EE EN 284 SETTIME c ccccssssssccessececcessesucsessesesessesucsessesacsesaesessesacsussesaesusstsacsesseeaeeaee 285 286 SHR ececssccessesecsessesssessesucsesuececsesaesessesuesssesuesesaesaesesaeesstsacsussesaesneassaeeeaeens 287 1 CLRDISP cscssscssscessesescessessececsesssesaesuesesaesuesessesussesaesnsstsatsnesteaeeaes 288 IBI RRRRRRRRRRRRMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMKMKFFETTmTWWIUU 289 290 291 TIMER RR E E RERO 292 293 AMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMKFREIRIHNMMMMMMMMMMMMKNAVWWWWMWMM 294 295 UNLATCH COIL
19. Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 171 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets ICM EBB 200 Features Hardware Counter EEPROM Storage Retentive Variables Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WARITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Hardware Counter CNTRTMR High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 172 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets ICM EBB 3
20. Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 204 Chapter 22 Function Reference TP TP Description IN The TP pulse timer is a programmable one shot timer with a variable turn on time When the input IN input is true the timer begins timing and the output Q is energized When PI ET the elapsed time ET is equal to the preset time PT the output Q de energizes goes false When the input IN goes from true to false the timer is only reset if the elapsed time ET is equal to the preset time PT If they are not equal the reset will not occur until they are equal and IN must still be false Input Output Connections The TP function block placement requires connections of two input pins IN PT and two output pins Q ET Active State Other Details NEN NEN OX LX Example Circuit 2 Timing Diagram e eS SSS 0 Elapsed Time 2 True On o U LC NES o ENS False Off pg True IN be ee False Off Related Functions TON TOF Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 295 Chapter 22 Function Reference UNLATCH COIL UNLATCH COIL Description ur The UNLATCH coil is for use with the LATCH coil operates similar
21. Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Hardware Counter 2 Digital Outputs 1 External Analog Input 2 Internal Analog Inputs Pots Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 199 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets 51 210 Features EEPROM Storage 4 Multifunction I O 1 Programmable LED Hardware Counter Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not
22. or amp paste the provided Counter You will need the Activation key provided by Key below then click Proceed EZ LADDER and your CID Code located on the back of your EZ LADDER Toolkit CD case Activation Key 121C Counter Kep Po If you do not have your CID Code you must emus obtain it prior to continuing the activation EC Contact Divelbiss Customer Support 0 If you close EZ LADDER prior to completing activation the original Activation Key cannot be used new Activation Key must be used to activate the EZ LADDER Toolkit Copy Paste or type your Activation key into the EE Activation key form box on the web site Activation and 9 DN Eos Registration page if not already pre loaded Internet EZ LADDER Toolkit Activation Explorer will preload this for you Mimmo i Mimi Complete all other form entries All information must be completed The CID Code is found on the EZ LADDER Toolkits CD Case located on back side Click the REGISTER amp GET KEY button The Activation key and other information will be confirmed and if valid a Counter Key Username and Password will be displayed Save the Username and Password as they can be used to download updates to EZ LADDER Toolkit Number incorrect CID Code or if this serial number has been registered more times than allowed per the license agreement typically 2 times C
23. to activate the EZ LADDER Toolkit Click the AGREE ea box and click NEXT then cick be Neo Balto cic Cans Agreement e Licensee or otherwise in violation of this Agreement is expressly prohibited Introduction Whereas Divelbiss has developed certain modules of computer software known as PLC ON A CHIP Kemel and EZ LADDER Toolkit and Licensee wishes to secure certain rights to use such software and Div Jvelbiss is prepared to license such rights subject to the tems and conditions of this Agreement in consideration of the mutual covenants contained herein and intending to be legaly bound hereby Divelbiss and Licensee agree as follows Licensed Software The PLC ON ACHIP Kemel and EZ LADDER Toolkit software whether in source code or object code format and all related documentation and revisions updates and modifications thereto do not agree agree Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 10 Chapter 1 Getting Started 2 Click the link provided A web browser window will saron open to the registration and activation page on Activation Instructions D ivel biss Visit http www divelbiss com products zoftware Ez L adder activate aspx ar call 1 800 245 2327 to activate this product Provide the Activation printed below and your user information and vou will be a provided with a Counter Key
24. Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM_ SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Optional Multipurpose Serial Port Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 183 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC 411X E R Features OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage 0 5VDC Analog Inputs x 4 12 bit 4 PWM Capable Outputs x 4 Output Current Feedback PWM Modbus Slave Hardware Counters 2 Channels J1939 Communications Serial Printing Retentive Variables Supported Function B
25. Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 169 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLCMOD M2 25621X PLCMOD M2 25631X All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Using certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels SPI Slave DAC7612 D A SPI Hardware Counter Synchronous Serial Interface 551 LS7366R CNTR SPI HDIO Bus Serial Printing Real Time Clock DS1305 SPI Retentive Variables Modbus Slave OptiCAN Networking Keypad Support EEPROM Storage J1939 Communications LCD Display Support ADS7841 A D SPI PWM Outputs ADS8344 A D SPI Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Grey Scale Encoder GC SSI Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise
26. Example Circuit CRI CRA Related Functions DIRECT CONTACT DIRECT COIL INVERTED COIL Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 247 Chapter 22 Function Reference 1939 SPN 1939 SPN Description The J1939 SPN function reads data from a J1939 network When placing the J1939 SPN function the actual SPN Suspect Parameter Number must be selected See SPN List ing EN When enable is true the function is active The Q output is true only when the J1939 data RR for the specified SPN is valid false when not valid The ERR output is an integer number representing error codes that correspond to communication issues with the selected SPN and the J1939 bus The VAL output is the actual value of the parameter that was received on the selected SPN This value is in engineering units based on how the target is con VAL figured Input Output Connections The J1939 SPN function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and three output pins Q ERR VAL OX p c vets fo LL LLL __ ouput LX re wien daa or SPs vad Example Circuit 2 RA Error VAL Value J1939 SPN Block Error Codes Code Number Title Description 1 SPN NOT FOUND The SPN number is not a currently supported number on the PLC on a Chip target controller Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 240 Chapter 22 Function Reference
27. Standard Edition EZ LADDER TOOLKIT EZ LADDER TOOLKIT INSTALLATION SETUP Install EZ LADDER Standard Edition V1 0 4 1 What s New in V1 0 4 1 View Readme Installation Notes If this screen does not appear Click the start button and choose RuN Browse to the CD Drive the EZ LADDER directory and then the Vx x x x directory Select Setup exe and click ok and ok to run the installer View the EZ LADDER Tutorial View Manuals amp Data Sheets See other Divelbiss Products View Application Notes Divelbiss Corporation 9778 Mt Gilead Rd www divelbiss com Fredericktown Ohio 43019 Sales Email sales divelbiss com Phone 1 800 245 2327 Support Email standardsupport divelbiss com Fax 740 694 9035 3 The EZLADDER Toolkit Installation Wizard will open Click NEXT Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for EZ Ladder Toolkit The InstallShield wizard will install EZ Ladder Toolkit on your computer To continue click Next Next gt Cancel Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 8 Chapter 1 Getting Started 4 Complete the Name Organization fields and enter the Serial Number Do not click the SELECT LICENSE xML button This button should only be used under Divelbiss personnel supervision Click NExT The serial number entered is used during 0 activation If the serial number is not correct you will not be able to activate your EZ LADDER Toolkit later 5 Use
28. 2 PGN NOT FOUND The PGN number is not a currently supported number on the PLC on a Chip target controller 3 VALUE NOT AVAILABLE The data value for the specified SPN was not available Possible cause may be the engine does not support this parameter 4 VALUE ERROR RESERVED The was an error retrieving the SPN value or the SPN is reserved Possible cause may be a sensor is malfunctioning and a value cannot be read Supported Suspect Parameter Numbers SPN List UJ Parameter PGN Bit Si N A T it Res Gain Res Metric English Offset Units Units 0 00390625 Extended Crankcase Blow by Pressure Throttle Position Engine Intercooler Temperature Particulate Trap Inlet Pressure Wheel based Vehicle Speed 16 Cruise Control Set Speed Accelerator Pedal AP Position Percent Load at Current Speed Fuel Delivery Pressure Engine Oil Level Engine Oil Pressure Crankcase Pressure Boost Pressure Intake Manifold 1 Temperature 65270 Air Inlet Pressure 65270 Air Filter Differential Pressure 65270 Coolant Pressure 65263 Engine Coolant Temperature 65262 111 Coolant Level 65263 112 Coolant Filter Differential Pressure 65270 114 Net Battery Current 65271 115 Alternator Current 65271 123 Clutch Pressure 65272 124 Transmission Oil Level 65272 Co cO NO AJN N Co km h km h AB INS EN 100 101 102 105 10
29. 97 Modbus Slave Communication Errors 98 Modbus Slave Supported Master Functions 98 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 13 Modbus Networking Modbus Slave Modbus is a register based communication protocol connecting multiple devices to a single network De vices on this network are divided into two types Master and Slave There is only one master device on a network The master is in control and initiates communication to the other devices Each device that is not a master must be a s ave Multiple slaves may be located on a network Slave devices isten for communi cation from the master and then respond as they are instructed The master always controls the communi cation and can communicate to only one or all of the slaves Slaves can not communicate with each other directly EZ LADDER Toolkit provides the ability to add Modbus slave functionality to a ladder diagram making the device a Modbus Slave EZ LADDER Toolkit only supports Modbus Slave Another device must be used on the network to Serve as the Modbus Master Modbus Slave support is based on actual hardware target specifications PLC on a Chip Integrated Circuits and Modules support Modbus Slave as well as do some standard Divelbiss PLCs and Controllers For PLCs and controllers refer to the supported features See Chapter 20 Har
30. A the values of these variables which turn changes the analog output value ud DAC7612 Properties SPI Port SPIO m CS Output IGPO12 Load Output GPO10 E Channels CHO Enabled Variable Name DAC SPI 0 12 0 CH1 Enabled Variable Name Figure 15 14 Click close the DAC7612 Device Properties click to close the DAC7612 Properties and click ox to close the PLC on a Chip target settings dialog and click ox again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project With the device properly interface and connected to the target the analog outputs are controlled based on the values of the assigned variables in the EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 131 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support LS7366R 32 Bit Quadrature Counter The LS7466R is a 32 bit Quadrature Counter integrated circuit with an SPI interface EZ LADDER Toolkit has built in software support for using this device on an SPI port The LS7466R is a hardware device and requires additional circuitry and knowledge to interface it an EZ LADDER supported target At this time only PLC on a Chip or custom targets support the use of the LS7466R Counter This chapter discusses the basics of using the LS7466R in the ladder diagram and minor references to hardware when needed Installing the LS7366R in the Ladder Diagram Project To be
31. M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 2 Table of Contents Chapter 6 Downloading and Running Projects 55 Switching Modes in EZ LADDER 56 Monitor Mode OVeIVIOW AUR CDD 57 Connecting toa RE E M 58 Connecting for the First Time to a New Target nnn nnn nnn nnn 60 Downloading Ladder Diagram Projects to 61 MN 61 Chapter 7 Retentive Variables amp EEPROM Storage 64 What is R tentive Variable e 65 How to Make a Variable 65 Itetentve imus ih Qus 66 EEPROM Memory 66 Installing EEPROM Memory a 66 EEPROM MODIOEU T CU SU UE ERU 67 Chapter 8 Pulse Width Modulation eee ree ree 68 What is Pulse Width Modulation
32. M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 2 6 Chapter 22 Function Reference ROL ROL Description EN The ROL function provides a left bit rotation of the P1 input P2 specifies the number of one bit rotations The P1 number is a integer representation of a binary number The P2 number is an integer representation of the number of binary rotations shifts to occur to P1 The actual bit only rotates when the maximum number is reached example 32 bit P rotation to the input number 1 The enable EN must be true for the ROL function to be enabled The Q output is true when the ROL function is enabled The O Output is the ro tated number represented in integer form Input Output Connections P The ROL function block placement requires connections of 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q WoPi Integer Real Boolean Timer ActiveState OtherDetalls m ma X wm OPI ome x o LP f m Po X Jo ooo Lo ow x nj j j mq d Example Circuit Related Functions ROR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 211 Chapter 22 Function Reference ROR ROR Description The ROR function provides a right bit rotation of the P1 input P2 specifies the number of one bit rotations The P1 number is a integer representation of a binary number The P2 number is an integer representation of the numbe
33. Please see the following steps required to configure the OptiCAN network feature on a controller Actual menus steps to reach the OptiCAN configuration may vary based on the actual controller used but the con figuration itself is always the same Divelbiss standard controllers based on PLC on a Chip Enhanced Baby Bear PCS XXX etc are configured based on the part number For details on specific targets please see Chapter 20 Hardware Targets The OptiCAN is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the properties button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find OptiCAN Figure 14 2 shows the Device Properties window a Device Properties cj Pulse Width Modulation Dallas 1305 Real Time Clock Figure 14 2 Click OptiCAN and click The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties win dow will now list the OptiCAN as an installed device Click the OptiCAN in the device list The PROPERTIES button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 14 3 ud PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 256
34. The function is enabled when a false to true is seen on EN AD provides the actual address to read from and V is the actual value that is read from the EEPROM Q is true when the read cycle has completed Q The same variable type that writes to the EEPROM location should be used to read the EEPROM location A memory map is recommended for organizing variables stored in EEPROM Each EEPROM address is absolute and is one byte in size Boolean variables fill two bytes while all other variable types fill four bytes of EEPROM When reading variables from EEPROM storage it is important that use the exact address location for the variable only taking into account variable types and sizes See EEPROM_WRITE for more on how variables are written to EEPROM storage Input Output Connections The EEPROM READ function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN AD and two output pins Q V worm type integer Real Boolean Timer ActiveState Oterbetals en wma X om mk X out PK Lov x x j x j X j ooo Example Circuit HHROM Related Functions EEPROM WRITE Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 234 Chapter 22 Function Reference EEPROM WRITE EEPROM WRITE Description EN Q The EEPROM WRITE function allows variables to be stored in non volatile memory EEPROM The function is enabled when the E
35. USER MANUAL Release Version 4 14 For M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit V1 2 2 0 Standard Edition LADDER TOOLKIT ONE TOOLKIT FOR MULTIPLE SOLUTIONS Programming Manual for all M Series PLC on a Chip Based Products Using M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit Divelbiss Corporation 2004 2015 Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Getting 5 Whats New or Changed V1 2 2 0 avvio Eaue ku wu aS RUD V CE GE KUENS 6 ui uod TIES 7 Installing the EZ LADDER 8 Activating the EZ LADDER 10 Installing Additional Copies of EZ LADDER 12 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit 13 EZ LADDER ToolKit OVOLVIOW s Esc tenu hac REFER daa d 14 EZ LADDER Auer i MENUS pet 15 EZ LADDER Toolkit Tool Bars and Tool Bar Buttons 19
36. a Device Properties Figure 12 1 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 90 Chapter 12 41939 Networking Click J1939 and click The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties win dow will now list the J1939 as an installed device Click the J1939 in the device list The PROPERTIES button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 12 2 a PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X M Figure 12 2 Click the PRoPERTIES button The J1939 Properties dialog box will open In this dialog box select the CAN Port to use Only available ports will be displayed Configure the unit of measure Refer to Figure 12 3 ad 1939 Properties CAN Port Units Metric Figure 12 3 Click close the Target s properties and click again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project J1939 Communications can now be utilized from the ladder diagram project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 91 Chapter 12 41939 Networking Receiving J1939 Network Data With the Serial Print configured in the ladder diagram project it is now possible to use the EZ LADDER Tool kits function blocks to serially transmit text and set points To serial print the SERIAL PRINT function block is used To monitor or read a parameter using J1939 the parameter s SPN number must be known A list of
37. 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 Node Status This Node s Status Read 190 CAN Transmit Errors CAN Transmit Error Counter Read 189 CAN Receive Errors CAN Receive Error Counter Read MEN co a The Node Status register 191 is represented by a 32 bit number The lower 16 bits represents the current status code while the upper 16 bits represents the error code There are three status codes supported on the OptiCAN network The status codes are 1 Reset 2 Active and 4 Error If the status code is 0 this would represent the OptiCAN network has not started Error codes are divided into two groups Device specific errors are numbered 0 32767 while common error codes are numbered 32768 65535 Common Error Codes are as follows 65535 CAN Controller Receive Error 65531 CAN Controller Bus Off State 65534 CAN Controller Receive Warning 65530 CAN Controller Data Overrun 65533 CAN Controller Transmit Error 65519 OptiCAN Heartbeat Timeout 65532 CAN Controller Transmit Warning 65518 CAN Controller Error Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 107 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking Broadcasting to Other Controllers and Devices To broadcast from one controller to other controllers and devices the following steps should be completed before proceeding 1 All OptiCAN Devices and Controllers on the network must be identified with unique Node ID numbers and configured properly 2 Register ass
38. A D Converter 125 058341 16 Bit Analog to Digital A D Converter 127 DAC7612 12 Bit Digital to Analog D A Converter 129 LS7366R 32 Bit Quadrature Counter eese 132 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 118 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support SPI Slave Support EZ LADDER Toolkit provides the ability to be used on an SPI bus as an SPI slave device SPI slave func tionality is configured in the Project Settings and must be supported on the actual hardware target Configuring SPI Slave Support To be able to use the SPI Slave feature in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project the SPI Slave fea ture must first be installed and configured As the PLC on a Chip 1 the most commonly used target for SPI Slave it will be used as an example to install and configure The SPI Slave is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the PRoPERTIES button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scro
39. ADD Print to LCD LCD PRINT Bitwise AND AND Pulse With Modulation PWM Average AVG PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Bit Pack BIT PACK Quadrature Counter CNTR LS7366R Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Convert to Real REAL Compare CMP Rotate Left ROL Clear LCD LCD CLEAR Rotate Right ROR Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Count Down CTD Select SEL Count Up CTU Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Count Up Down CTUD Shift Left SHL Division DIV Shift Right SHR Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Set Reset Set Dominant SR Falling Edge Detect TRIG Subtraction SUB High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Convert to Timer TIMER Hysteresis HYSTER Time Delay Off TOF Convert to Integer INTEGER Time Delay On TON J1939 Receive J1939 SPN Pulse Timer TP Latching Coil LATCH Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Limit LIMIT Bitwise XOR XOR Indicates with an Expansion Option Installed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 192 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PCS PLC Models Each PCS model supports different features and function blocks based on the base PLC on a Chip pro cessor and different peripherals on board When any PCS model PCS XXX is selected in the Project Set tings all the supported features and function blocks are installed automatically PCS 1X0 Features Real Time Clock HDIO Expansion B
40. CR NS Horizontal Link Vertical Link Figure 3 4 Connection Types As seen in previous sections the use of power rails horizontal and vertical links creates a wide variety of ways to draw ladder diagram circuits Below are some typical connection types They are created by using horizontal and vertical links Simple Series Connection CHI CR3 Figure 3 5 Multiple Device Series Connection CHI CH2 CAS Figure 3 6 Parallel Connection CRT CR3 Figure 3 7 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 28 Chapter 3 Ladder Diagram Basics Complex Series Parallel Connection CRI CR2 CR4 CR3 CR3 Figure 3 8 Understanding Ladder Diagram Functionality When a ladder diagram is installed on a PLC or other controller it will scan the program from top to bottom and left to right A scan is similar to reading a page A page is read from top to bottom reading each line left to right One complete reading of the program is considered a scan The larger the scan time one complete read cycle the less often any real world I O devices are monitored and controlled Scan time is an important consideration in the design of a ladder diagram This scan time may be viewed in the Monitor Mode when running a ladder diagram with a hardware target Figure 3 9 diagrams the functionality and order which a ladder diagram functions All real world inputs are read All
41. Chapter 16 SSI Encoder Each of the parameters must be completed for the GC SSI function block and SSI feature to function cor rectly Mode Master or Slave The GC 581 supports a master and slave combination Select which this will be configured as If no slave is required select Master SSI Port Choose the SSI Port Currently only one port is supported and is selected by default SSI Clock Rate This is the serial clock rate for the encoder Refer to the encoder s data sheet for this setting Resolution This is the encoder s resolution Refer to the encoder s data sheet for this setting When all the information is entered clicking will cause the function block to be placed in the ladder dia gram project Figure 16 4 is a sample of a complete GC SSI circuit The variable connected to CV will be equal to the absolute encoder position See Chapter 22 Function Reference for function block details When functioning the GC 551 block returns an integer value representing the Gray code reading from the encoder This is read serially converted from Gray code to a binary number then returned to the block as an Integer output CHI GC Figure 16 4 Slave SSI Encoder Input For redundancy purposes EZ LADDER Toolkit supports connecting two targets controllers to one abso lute SSI encoder In this configuration one is considered a Master and one a Slave The SSI functionality is installed and used nearly the s
42. Editor Mode An object already exists where you are trying to place another object Select a new location to place the object Object type X not found Aborting load Editor Mode Error loading program into EZ LADDER Toolkit The ladder diagram file may be corrupt Packet contained a formatting ERROR Monitor Mode An packet formatting error was detected in a packet during communication with a target Packet contained an invalid checksum Monitor Mode An invalid checksum was detected in a packet during communication with a target Packet length was invalid Monitor Mode An invalid communications packet length was detected during communications with the connected target Please save project before compiling Editor Mode EZ LADDER Toolkit projects must be saved prior to allowing them to be compiled Save the ladder diagram project Please select a target Editor Mode A target has not been selected You must select and configure a target in the Project Settings before placing any objects and function blocks Please select a target before compiling Editor Mode Unable to compile because no target was selected You must select and configure a target in the Project Settings before compiling Please select a target before verifying Editor Mode Unable to run program verification because no target is selected You must select and configure a target in the Project Settings before verifying Targets do not match Monitor Mode When con
43. LADDER Toolkit for tool bar and buttons EZ LADDER Toolkit will switch from the Edit Mode to the Moni tor Mode While the ladder diagram workspace will appear similar some tool bars and buttons will change adding functionality for features only needed in Monitor Mode Figure 6 1 shows EZ LADDER Toolkit in the Monitor Mode r EZ EZ Ladder Standard Ladder Diagram Project Name did o EZ File Edit View Project Reports Window Help x co PERSO Status Program Name Program Version Build Number Scan Time ms Targ Info 1 CRI CR2 E Coils E Contacts Functions Variables CR2 DI CR3 i Labels 4 Ready Figure 6 1 In addition to the tool bar changes the Output Window is not available in the Monitor Mode as the program should be compiled in the Edit Mode prior to switching to the Monitor Mode Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 56 Chapter 6 Downloading amp Running Projects Switching to Edit Mode When in the Monitor Mode to switch back to the Edit Mode on the tool bar click the Edit button EZ LAD DER Toolkit will switch from Monitor Mode to the Edit Mode All Edit Modes standard tool bars menus and windows will reappear Monitor Mode Overview While the Monitor Mode generally looks similar to the Edit Mode the tool bars menus and windows can dif fer greatly Refer to F
44. M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 35 Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Updating Installing Target Kernels As new targets functions and features are added to the EZ LADDER Toolkit and new versions of EZ LADDER Toolkit are developed and released to take advantage of newer features it will be necessary to update the actual target s kernel with newer version These same steps may be taken to install a kernel in a target that is new as all new targets from the factory do not have kernels installed EZ LADDER Toolkit provides an easy way to update the kernel on the hardware target 1 Obtain the new kernel for the target provided by Divelbiss via CD e mail or download 2 Start EZ LADDER Toolkit and open any project that uses the target or create a new project with the actual hardware target selected This project must have at least one rung of ladder 3 Verify the Serial Port Settings and connect the target to the computer 4 Enter the Monitor Mode 5 From the Project menu select Bootloader 6 EZLADDER will connect to the target and the Bootloader dialog will open showing the current version of the target s kernel if any It will also display the target s bootloader version See Figure 4 5 uL Bootloader Current Target Settings Target Version fioso Bootloader Version 007 Serial Number 90000006 Upload File FileName Browse Target Version Erase User Program Update Target Figure 4
45. MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 181 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC 401X E R Features OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage 0 5VDC Analog Inputs x 4 10 bit 4 PWM Capable Outputs x 4 Output Current Feedback PWM Modbus Slave Hardware Counters 2 Channels J1939 Communications Serial Printing Retentive Variables Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM_ SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert
46. OptiCAN is a Divelbiss proprietary CAN Controller Area Network that provides a communication link be tween Divelbiss OptiCAN enabled controllers and other OptiCAN enabled controllers and devices such as I O modules The Divelbiss OptiCAN network supports up to 64 nodes devices and is register based Each node supports up to 256 registers and communication can be triggered based on time or on an event Divelbiss OptiCAN can perform the following major functions 1 Allow controllers to access external I O Devices 2 Allow controllers to access other controllers 3 Allow the user to configure devices utilizing the CAN protocol Only Divelbiss OptiCAN enabled devices will communicate on the network OptiCAN network Connecting non OptiCAN devices will result in network errors including loss of communication Planning the OptiCAN Network As with any network or communication scheme the network should be planned taking into account the amount of communication broadcast rate communication triggers register assignments and timing require ments This plan is essential for a successful implementation of a network It is suggested that register needs should be identified and assigned for each device prior to the start Q of the programming While any legal register may be used it is recommended that register assignments start at the high end of available registers and work backward i e start with register 127 and then assign 126 and so on As so
47. Set Reset Dominant RS Count Down CTD Select SEL Count Up CTU Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Count Up Down CTUD Shift Left SHL Division DIV Shift Right SHR Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Set Reset Set Dominant SR Falling Edge Detect TRIG Subtraction SUB High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Convert to Timer TIMER Hysteresis HYSTER Time Delay Off TOF Convert to Integer INTEGER Time Delay On TON J1939 Receive J1939 SPN Pulse Timer TP Latching Coil LATCH Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Limit LIMIT Bitwise XOR XOR Indicates with an Expansion Option Installed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 189 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC HMI C215X E R Features OptiCAN Networking Serial Printing 2 Counter Inputs Retentive Variables 2x16 Large Font Display 4 PWM Outputs EEPROM Storage Programmable Buttons LEDS 2 15 bit Analog Inputs J1939 Communications Programmable Beeper Current Feedback for PWM Outputs 5232 422 485 Serial Port Display Heater 2 Relay Outputs Modbus Slave 6 Digital Inputs Optional Expansion Features Up to 4 PWM Capable Outputs 12 bit DAC Outputs Quadrature Counter Type K Thermocouple Inputs 10 bit Analog Input 5V 10V 20mA Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Moving Average MAVG Less Than Equal To lt Maximum MAX Not Equal To lt gt Minimum MIN Equal To Modulo MOD EEPROM Read EEPROM READ Multiplicatio
48. an integer variable exists that will be equal to the digital representation of the real world analog input signal Typically this number ranges from 0 1023 with zero representing the low end OVDC OmADC etc and 1023 representing the upper end of the range 5VDC 20mADC etc As these variables represent the analog inputs they can be tied directly to function blocks that have integer inputs and if necessary these variables may be converted to REAL variables using the REAL function block Figure 19 3 shows a ladder diagram using the analog input variable ANO as an input to a function block CMP CRI EN LT pPI CR3 Set GT Figure 19 3 Averaging Analog Input Readings to analog inputs the analog input variables values will change frequently Typically analog inputs will toggle normally one bit of resolution To minimize the effect of this bit toggle and environmental conditions it is recommended to average each analog input Q As analog signals are susceptible to many environmental factors such as noise etc when connected Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 155 Chapter 19 Analog Inputs It is recommended to use the MAVG function block Moving Average When placing this block you must enter the number of samples to be averaged The larger the number of samples the more RAM is used and the slower the reaction time of the block output to input changes Size the number
49. select the Serial Port to use Only available ports will be displayed Using the drop down menus and other fields configure the serial port settings COM Port Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Flow Control and Buffer Size as required to interface to the device that is connected to the actual serial port Refer to Figure 11 3 a Serial Properties ity NONE Hardware Flow Control Figure 11 3 Click close the Target s properties and click again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project The Serial Print can now be utilized from the ladder diagram project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 86 Chapter 11 Serial Printing Support Printing Data to a Serial Device using a Serial Port With the Serial Print configured in the ladder diagram project it is now possible to use the EZ LADDER Tool kits function blocks to serially transmit text and set points To serial print the SERIAL PRINT function block is used Transmitting Text Serially To transmit using the serial port the SERIAL PRINT function block is used Using the SERIAL PRINT func tion block is a two step process When placing the function block a new Serial Print Properties dialog box will open See Figure 11 4 The Text field is where the message is typed that will be transmitted a Serial Print Properties Name SERIAL PRINT1 Description Text will Pr
50. the Save As dialog is displayed Save As The Save As menu item is used to save the currently selected EZ LADDER Toolkit Ladder Diagram Project under a new name Print Opens the Print dialog box for printing the currently selected EZ LADDER Toolkit Ladder Diagram Project with the settings defined in the Print Setup menu Print Preview Opens a window to view the ladder diagram project as it is to be printed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 15 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit Print Setup Opens a window to configure print and printer settings Exit Closes all currently opened ladder diagram projects and closes the EZ LADDER Toolkit application program EDIT MENU The EDIT Menu includes the standard windows functionality for editing and editing preferences The EDIT Menu items are Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Select All Settings Undo The Undo will cause the last action performed to be undone Redo The Redo will cause an action that was undone using the Undo to be repeated or completed again Cut The Cut menu is disabled in the EZ LADDER Toolkit To delete an object or multiple objects select the object s using the selector tool and remove by press the DELETE key Copy The Copy is disabled in the EZ LADDER Toolkit To copy an object or multiple objects select the object s using the selector tool right click the mouse and select copy This will copy all the selected objects
51. 5 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 36 Chapter 4 Configuring Targets 6 Click the ERAsE USER PROGRAM button to erase the ladder diagram project on the target if any This is recommended before updating the kernel This applies to Bootloader versions 1 0 0 5 and later If this is a new blank target this step is not necessary 7 Click Browse and select the kernel file for the hardware target The dialog will update showing the selected kernel file version in the Upload File section of the Bootloader dialog box 8 To update or install the new kernel click UPDATE TARGET A status box will appear indicating the status of the kernel installation During this the new kernel is being installed This may take several minutes When updating or installing a kernel DO NOT REMOVE the CABLE or the POWER If 0 interrupted during this process the target will be corrupted and return to bootloader mode You must repeat all the above steps again the kernel automatically and will display an error if the wrong kernel is selected and an update is attempted If a wrong kernel is somehow loaded contact Divelbiss Technical Support for help regarding removing incorrect kernels Only the correct target s kernel may be installed into a target The target is checked against Target Utilities EZ LADDER Toolkit provides additional target utilities that may be used to correct actual target problems Although rare
52. 52 33 Figure 4 7 If the actual hardware target does not support a Real Time Clock then an error dialog box may appear if you were successfully connected to the hardware target prior to press the F11 button Click ok to continue From this dialog you can compare the actual computer time and date to the current time and date set on the hardware target If you wish to synchronize the time set the hardware target to the computer time click the sync W Pc button The times should now be synchronized The ladder diagram project can be erased from this dialog by pressing the ERAsE UsER PROGRAM button Use caution when deleting the ladder diagram project from the target There is no Undo To reload the hardware target the original ladder diagram project must be opened compiled and reloaded to the target Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 39 CHAPTER 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects This chapter provides basic information and understanding to create ladder diagram projects using EZ LADDER Toolkit including variables variable types inserting variables inserting objects and functions bit addressable variables drawing links inserting and deleting rungs saving ladder diagram projects and verifying and compiling ladder diagram projects Chapter Contents Creating Ladder Diagram Projects eese 41 Understanding Objects amp Variables
53. 5V 10V 20mA Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Maximum MAX Less Than Equal To lt Minimum MIN Not Equal To lt gt Modulo MOD Equal To Multiplication MULT EEPROM Read EEPROM READ OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Greater Than gt Quadrature Counter CNTR LS7366R Greater Than Equal To gt Bitwise NOT NOT Absolute Value ABS Bitwise OR OR Addition ADD Pulse With Modulation PWM Bitwise AND AND Print to LCD LCD PRINT Average AVG PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Bit Pack BIT PACK Rising Edge Detect TRIG Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Real REAL Clear LCD LCD CLEAR Rotate Left ROL Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Rotate Right ROR Compare CMP Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Count Down CTD Select SEL Count Up CTU Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Count Up Down CTUD Shift Left SHL Division DIV Shift Right SHR Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Set Reset Set Dominant SR Falling Edge Detect TRIG Subtraction SUB High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Convert to Timer TIMER Hysteresis HYSTER Time Delay Off TOF Convert to Integer INTEGER Time Delay On TON J1939 Receive J1939 SPN Pulse Timer TP Latching Coil LATCH Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Limit LIMIT Bitwise XOR XOR Moving Average MAVG Indicates with an Expansion Option Installed Divelbiss Cor
54. AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Counter Quadrature CNTR LS7366R Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Keypad KEYPAD Latching Coil LATCH LCD Clear LCD CLEAR LCD Print LCD PRINT Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL oet Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 170 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets Enhanced Baby Bear PLC Models Each Enhanced Baby Bear model supports different features a
55. CHIP Device Name Description 32 Quadrature Counter SPI Bus 0 Figure 15 16 The SPI port must be installed individually or no SPI ports will show available in later drop down configuration menus Click the PROPERTIES button The LS7466R Properties dialog box will open Click the app button A new dia log will open where you can select the properties required to communicate with this specific device as well as configuration of device Multiple SPI devices may be placed on the same SPI port These devices can be of the same part combination of different types of supported SPI devices Each device must have a unique CS Chip Select assigned for each device on the SPI bus EZ LADDER Toolkit uses the on board PLC on a Chip SPI ports and general purpose outputs GPOs Only certain GPO pins may be used as the chip select pins Select the SPI port from the drop down menu and select the general purpose output pin GPO that will serve as this device s chip select CS With these two devices selected additional channel information will be available to configure See Figure 15 17 The LS7366R may be configured to run in several modes Each mode has specific operation parameters and features that may be utilized in the ladder diagram project These modes and parameters are config ured in this dialog box Refer to the LS7366R integrated circuit data sheet for details to understand options featu
56. Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Analog Inputs x 6 Analog Outputs x 2 PWM Outputs x 2 Hardware Counter OptiCAN Networking J1939 Communications Gray Scale SSI Encoder Port Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 196 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets Solves It Plug in PLC Models Each Solves lt model supports different features and function blocks based on the base PLC on a Chip processor and different peripherals on board When any Solves It model SI XXX is selected in the Project Settings all the supported features and function blocks are installed automatically 51 100 Features EEPROM Storage 4 Digital Inputs Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal
57. Components The Basic Components menu item will cause the basic components tool bar to be visible or hidden This tool bar includes buttons for the direct contact inverted contact direct coil inverted coil CTU CTD CTUD TP TON and TOF functions Cross References The Cross References menu item will cause the Cross Reference Window to be visible or hidden Edit Tools The Edit Tools menu item will cause the edit tools tool bar to be visible or hidden This tool bar includes buttons for select horizontal link vertical link Edit Vars Inst Vars Verify Compile C MON and text boxes Abc Function List The Function List menu item will cause the drop down function list to be visible or hidden This tool bar is used to select and insert functions into the ladder diagram project Output The Output menu item will cause the Output Window to be visible or hidden This window displays important messages during the Verify and Compile Operations During the Compile process it is important to have this window visible Information including compile status and errors are displayed here Toolbar The Toolbar menu item will cause the standard windows functions toolbar to be visible or hidden This tool bar includes New Open Save Cut Print and more PROJECT MENU The PROJECT Menu is used to view and configure Project target settings including hardware target selec tions and installing and configuring optional target features Divel
58. Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 20 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit CTU Count Up Function This inserts a Up Counter Function into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click CTO Count Down Function This inserts a Down Counter Function into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click Count Up and Down Function This inserts an Up and Down Counter Function into the CTUD ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click Pulse Timer Function This inserts an Pulse Timer Function into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click TP Timer Function This inserts an ON Timer Function into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click TOF Off Timer Function This inserts an OFF Timer Function into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click This is used to insert any function specifically those Insert Function functions that do not have a quick used tool bar A button Select the function from the drop down menu and click the Insert Function button This will place the function into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click Ladder Diagram Workspace The ladder diagram workspace is the area of the screen where objects and links are placed to create the ladder diagram program Most objects can be placed at any location in the workspace provided there is actual space available The DIRECT coil Negated c
59. Counter EEPROM Storage HDIO Expansion Port Retentive Variables Real Time Clock Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME Hardware Counter CNTRTMR High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 175 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets ICM EBB 600 Features Hardw
60. Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 166 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLCMOD M2 25600X All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Using certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels PWM Outputs ADS7841 A D SPI Hardware Counter SPI Slave ADS8341 A D SPI HDIO Bus Synchronous Serial Interface SSI DAC7612 D A SPI Retentive Variables Serial Printing LS7366R CNTR SPI Keypad Support Modbus Slave LCD Display Support Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Grey Scale Encoder GC 551 Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Counter Quadrature CNTR LS7366R Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Keypad KEYPAD Latching Coil LATCH EEPROM Storage LCD Clear LCD CLEA
61. Direct Contacts or Direct Coils are actually defined as variables themselves while other func tion blocks such as TON will require variables created inserted and connected using links to the function block itself to provide set points and other functional requirements Variables in the EZ LADDER Toolkit are global meaning that each variable must be uniquely named and can be changed or used anywhere in the ladder diagram project Using function blocks variables can pass data copy or move to other variables functions and objects Figure 5 2 illustrates a simple ladder diagram project that contains objects that are variables and inserted variables linked to function blocks EZ EZ ladder Standard EZ ladder uy ipu apu EZ File Edit View Project Reports Window Help 5 B amp F k ES C Abc ak dt o 4 CTUD TOF Direct Contact is Insert Function TON actual variable Start Stop RunTmr MotorStart named MotorStart MotorStart MotorStart TONI RunTmr ElapTime is actual variable inserted and linked to the function block TON1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 2 identifies the two typical ways variables are used in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram proj ect As shown the On Delay timer function block identified as TON1 uses two unique variables one for the set point PT and one for the ela
62. EZ LADDER Toolkit change to the Monitor Mode In the Monitor Mode using the Project Menu select OptiCAN The Divelbiss OptiCAN Configuration Tool will open in a new window See Figure 14 15 EZ LADDER Toolkit must have a project loaded and be in Monitor mode with OptiCAN enabled to open the OptiCAN Configuration Tool It is not necessary to connect to the target controller If connected to the controller the OptiCAN Configuration Tool will disconnect EZ LADDER Toolkit from the controller when it opens 0 Whenever the OptiCAN Configuration tool connects it automatically sends the Stop Network command The network will have to be restarted for proper operation Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 113 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking EF Divelbiss OptiCAN Configuration Tool n IN Reports Help Node ID Serial Number 4 1000 Harsh Environment Controller OF 240004 1100 Harsh Environment Digital 20 Ur 24005 Configure Made Figure 14 15 As shown in Figure 14 15 there are two devices on the OptiCAN network The tool shows the Node ID Type and Serial Number for each of the devices These two devices are already configured as they have Node ID s assigned When configuring a non controller device for the first time the device will display with a Node ID of 255 The 255 designation is reserved for devices that have not been configured See Figure 14 16 For m
63. False or True Off or On Real 234 56 192 345 Integer 1 525 1034 Timer Days Hours Minutes Seconds Milliseconds Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 44 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Boolean Variables Boolean variables are based on only being in one of two states typically either true or false 1 or 0 On or Off Boolean variables are most commonly used for contacts and coils but also may be used with function blocks as individual bits Real Variables Real variables are based on numbers that use floating point math use decimal points Real variables can range from 1 7 1038 to 1 7x10 Real variables are typically used for calculations and with functions where decimal point accuracy is required Real variables used with function blocks result in a slower Scan Time Integer Variables Integer variables are based on whole numbers no decimal points Integers can be ranged from 2147483647 to 214483647 Integers are used when decimal points are not required Integer result in a faster Scan Time than real variables Integer variables Default Value can be entered in Hexadecimal for mat Timer Variables Timer variables are used in conjunction with timer function blocks to provide input set points and output elapsed time Timer variables consist of milliseconds seconds minutes hours and days Variable Attributes For each variable type specific attributes will apply For m
64. Frequency B Pw Polarity Puy 0 Duty Cycle Puy hd 1 Duty Cycle Pul 2 Duty Cycle Pw 3 Duby Cycle Oo 44 444 Display Decimal Hexadecimal Figure 14 19 When each of the registers of the node have been configured click the save amp Exit button to save changes and close the Configure Registers dialog box and return to the Node Configuration dialog In addition to changing the trigger from this dialog the Value for each register can be changed providing the register is writable The numbers can be represented in decimal or in hex Figure 14 16 is set to dis play in decimal As an example register number 1 Digital Outputs will directly control the outputs on the node By changing the Value the outputs can be set to be on or off The values that may be entered are decimals that represent the binary bits that correspond to each individu al output mle eels NEN Corresponding Real 7 5 4 3 2 1 World Output Off Examples If Decimal Number Value 128 then Real World Output 8 is ON If Decimal Number Value 8 then Real World Output 4 is ON If Decimal Number Value 40 then Real World Outputs 4 and 6 are both ON Each non controller node has unique register assignments Refer to the actual product manual for details regarding register assignments Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 116 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking OptiCAN Node List N
65. LADDER Toolkit User Manual 165 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLCMOD M2 12801X All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Using certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels HDIO Bus Retentive Variables Hardware Counter Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Real Time Clock Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time
66. Ladder VV OVS AeA Ra a aE Ea n 21 Cross Reference Window Pane 22 Qutpu t dare le Uhl 23 Chapter 3 Ladder Diagram 24 Relay LOGIC VS Ladder 25 Basic Ladder Diagram Symbols 26 T ms 27 CONDECION TVDOS 28 Understanding Ladder Diagram eene nennen nns 29 Chapter 4 Configuring 30 Understanding TOf Ges cece ca cen eens EAE AEAEE EENE SN TMSCRUIO NBI EK 31 The Project Settings WINGOW Arca d 31 Selecting the Hardware Target wesvisiicciiivacesiansevivnesntevenenconwevaiwactatniceeaicwenaiencuadensisnnanwanereakenddnenaseuvstentaneusls 34 Viewing Target Informati n Pee 35 Updating Installing Target 36
67. No Power Flow 4 Ready Figure 6 7 Scan Time ocan time is calculated in real time updated and displayed in the Scan Time Field The scan time is always represented in milliseconds The scan time resolution is target specific For more information on scan time please see Chapter 3 Ladder Diagram Basics Starting and Stopping Program Execution The program on the target can be stopped and started again using the EZ LADDER Toolkit when in Monitor Mode and connected to the target V V To Stop a program from executing on the target on the tool bar click the Stop button This can be useful when troubleshooting and diagnosing ladder diagrams that do not operate as expected To Start a program executing on the target on the tool bar click the Go button This can be useful when troubleshooting and diagnosing ladder diagrams that do not operate as expected Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 62 Chapter 6 Downloading amp Running Projects Hover Boxes Another useful feature that can be utilized in real time monitoring is the use of hover boxes When the mouse pointer is hovered over an object a hover box will appear that provides additional information in re gards to the function or object including it s name and current status Figure 6 8 shows a typical hover box The mouse pointer is located over the contact CR2 Notice the hover box is now shown and identifies
68. OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage Real Time Clock PWM Outputs Output Monitoring Modbus Slave Hardware Counters 2 Channels J1939 Communications Serial Printing Retentive Variables Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Optional Multipurpose Serial Port Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT oet Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shif
69. PWM output frequency is dependent upon the actual hardware target and the resolution configured Changing the resolution or hardware target will change the acceptable range of the PWM outputs Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 69 Chapter 8 Pulse Width Modulation Configuring PWM in Project Settings As with most EZ LADDER Toolkit hardware supported features the PWM channels and functionality must installed and configured before it may be used in a ladder diagram project The PWM channels are config ured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the target and click the PRoPERTIES button Look in the target s Properties window for a PWM PROPERTIES button Click the PwM PROPERTIES button to open the PWM Properties window as shown in Figure 8 2 PWM Properties 2 3 B8 bit PWM 8 channels 1 16 bit PWM 4 channels Max Frequency Min Frequency Feri 4 CLK A Desired Frequency Hz Actual Frequency Hz Desired Frequency Hz Actual Frequency Hz Figure 8 2 The keystrokes and or buttons used may differ slightly to gain access to the PWM settings the PWM Properties Window is always identical without regard to the target selected The following describes the sections and functions for the PWM Properties windo
70. Properties dialog box will open Click the app button A new dia log will open where you can select the properties required to communicate with this specific device Multiple SPI devices may be placed on the same SPI port These devices can be of the same part or a combination of different types of supported SPI devices Each device must have a unique CS Chip Select assigned and a unique Load Output to control each device on the SPI bus EZ LADDER Toolkit uses the on board PLC on a Chip SPI ports and general purpose outputs GPOs Only certain GPO pins may be used as the chip select or the Load Output pins Select the SPI port from the drop down menu Select the general purpose output pin GPO that will serve as this device s chip select CS and select the Load Output pin GPO that will serve to control the D A de vice loading With these devices selected additional channel information will be available to configure See Figure 15 14 The DAC7612 supports up to 2 D A channels Using the provided check box select the actual channels that will be used in the ladder diagram project For each enabled channel a default Variable Name is automati cally created This name may be changed in the variable name box at this time See Figure 15 14 These variable names will be the variables in the ladder diagram that will hold the current analog output values set on the DAC7612 When the program runs the device is automatically updated with
71. R51 CR4 CRZ Truth Table Related Functions SR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 279 Chapter 22 Function Reference SEL SEL Description The SEL function provides selection of the P1 or P2 inputs If enable EN is false the out put O will be equal to the input P1 If the enable EN is true the output O will be equal to the input P2 The Q output is true when the SEL function is enabled P1 Input Output Connections The SEL function block placement requires connections of 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O P worm Type Integer Rea Boolean Timer ActiveState Other Dotais E ma TT X S o o m oom X X LP f mw x x p Jd ow x x j j p owe jJ X Example Circuit jPi oL Output Value2 f P2 Related Functions MUX Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 280 Chapter 22 Function Reference SERIAL PRINT SERIAL PRINT Description The SERIAL PRINT function is the transmit block for sending serial information using a multi purpose serial port EN When then EN input senses a rising edge the block begins the serial transmission of its text that was provided when the SERIAL PRINT function was placed The Q output is set ER true when the transmission is completed The ER output is set true if there is still dat
72. Register Type drop down box select the type of register to use of the four supported types In the Register Index box type the address number of the modbus register 1 10000 This number depends on the type of register and it s range of allowed register numbers a Edit Address Register Prefix MB_ Modbus Figure 13 3 updated immediately The MB_ and the register type 1 4 is automatically entered Only the actual register number needs to be added This register number is always between 1 and 10000 This register number is automatically added to the MB_ and type to create the register number in the correct range As the register type is selected and the number entered the Address Register displayed will be Click to close the Edit Address Register dialog box and return to the Add Edit Variable dialog box The register address is transferred to the text box automatically Click to save the variable The register is now assigned to a variable Q A Modbus address may be directly typed into the Address Register box without using button Updating Network and Variable Values When network registers are assigned to variables any change to the variable locally in the ladder diagram project is available to the master to see without additional programming If the master chooses to view the register it will see the variables current value If the master chooses to modify a register if
73. SETDATE Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 239 Chapter 22 Function Reference GETTIME GETTIME Description EN Q The GETTIME function reads the current time from the hardware real time clock The values of the time are stored into the integer variables on the output pins The enable EN must be true for the GETTIME function to be enabled HH The Q output is true when the function is enabled The HR output returns the hour of the day 0 23 the MN output returns the minutes and the SC returns the seconds The HR MN and SEC outputs must be connected to Integer variables Input Output Connections MN The GETTIME function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and four output pins Q HR MN SEC Type Integer Res Boolean Timer Active State i OE ma p Ameme ow X if Lm p owe I ML Output Output Example Circuit CRI GETTIME Hour Minute SC Seconds Related Functions GETDATE SETTIME SETDATE Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 240 Chapter 22 Function Reference GREATER THAN gt GREATER THAN Description The GREATER THAN provides an if greater than comparison for the Px inputs The num ber of inputs is specified when the object is placed The output Q is true if P1 is greater than P2 and P2 is greater than P3 and so on The enable
74. SR function block placement requires connections of two input pins S R and one output pin Q Type Integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Other Dotais mw ma J j ow Xx j JJ Example Circuit CR SR CR Truth Table Related Functions RS Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 290 Chapter 22 Function Reference SUB Description The SUB functions subtracts the P2 input from the P1 input The output O is the result of the subtraction The enable EN must be true for the SUB function to be enabled The Q output is true when the SUB function is enabled Input Output Connections The SUB function block placement requires connections of 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O Pin Active State Other Details EN px d Example Circuit Related Functions ADD MULT DIV ABS ON L9 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 291 Chapter 22 Function Reference TIMER TIMER Description EN Q The TIMER function converts the input P into an Timer output O The enable EN must be true for the REAL function to be enabled The Q output is true when the TIMER function is enabled The O output is a representation of the P input value in milliseconds 5 5ms 1000 21 Se
75. Series and P Series With the release of Version 1 2 2 0 and later EZ LADDER Toolkit has been separated into two distinct ver sions P Series EZ LADDER Toolkit and M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit To develop programs for targets of each they must be individually installed separately Both versions are included on the installation medium The following changes and corrections were added to EZ LADDER Toolkit V1 2 2 0 e Minor bug fixes for targets and EZ LADDER functionality Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 6 Chapter 1 Getting Started How to Use this Manual In this manual the following conventions are used to distinguish elements of text BOLD Italic SMALL CAPS Denotes labeling commands and literal portions of syntax that must appear exactly as shown Used for variables and placeholders that represent the type of text to be entered by the user Used to show key sequences or actual buttons such as OK where the user clicks the OK button In addition the following symbols appear periodically appear in the left margin to call the readers attention to specific details in the text Warns the reader of a potential danger or hazard that is associated with certain actions Appears when the text contains a tip that is especially helpful Indicates that the text contains information to which the reader should pay particularly close attention This manual is divided into Chapters th
76. Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 163 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLCHIP M2 51200 All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Using certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels PWM Outputs Real Time Clock 051305 SPI SPI Slave Synchronous Serial Interface SSI LS7366R CNTR SPI Hardware Counter HDIO Bus Serial Printing Retentive Variables Modbus Slave Keypad Support EEPROM Storage LCD Display Support Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Grey Scale Encoder GC 55 Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down Counter Quadrature CNTR LS7366R Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Ge
77. Started Activating the EZ LADDER Toolkit Until EZ LADDER Toolkit is activated it will only operated in DEMO mode which does not connecting to actual hardware targets controllers or downloading programs Now that the EZ LADDER Toolkit is installed it must be activated to enable all the features You will need the following to activate your EZ LADDER Toolkit 1 An internet connection and web browser like Internet Explorer does not have to be the computer that EZ LADDER is installed on 2 Your EZ LADDER Toolkit CD Case You will need your CID Code located on the back of the case 3 EZLADDER Toolkit installed Once activated EZ LADDER Toolkit is fully functional and will operate with hardware targets The process of registering and activating is completing the on line registration form receiving a counter key This key must be loaded into EZ LADDER Toolkit and when loaded it will activate your copy of EZ LADDER Toolkit If EZ Ladder is not registered it will prompt you to do so when the application is started To activate and register your EZ LADDER Toolkit follow the installation wizard as follows 1 When prompted to Activate EZ LADDER click ves You have not yet registered your EZ Ladder Would you like to register now Your EZ Ladder will not be fully functional until you have registered and received your activation license file 2 You must read and agree to the license agreement r a License Agreement
78. User Manual 237 Chapter 22 Function Reference GC SSI SSI Description EN Q The GC SSI function is used to interface to encoders that support Gray Code Synchro nous Serial Interface The interface is via the PLC on a Chip or target s SPI interface port The target must be configured properly to allow the SSI function to be selected and placed The EN input enables the function and Q is true when the function is enabled CV The GC SSI communicates serially over the SPI port to the encoder additional interface circuitry required The Output CV is an Integer representation of the encoder s value The encoder value is read gray code and then converted into a binary number This number is represent ed as an integer output The GC SSI Block must be configured to match the encoder s and cable specifications Input Output Connections The GC SSI function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and two output pins Q CV worm type integer Rest Boolean Timer ActiveState Other Deras en ma X Cater P oe X P pov owe jo x goo fo Example Circuit CHI GC Configuration Details a Gray Code SSI Properties Name CSS SSI Port Select the SSI Port to use Description SSI Clock Rate Select the clock rate baud rate for the encoder communication This is dependent on the encoder and cable length Refer to t
79. able to use the LS7466R in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project the LS7466R must first be installed and configured As the PLC on a Chip is the most commonly used target for the 1574666 it will be used as an example to install and configure the LS7466R The LS7466R is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the PRoPERTIESs button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find LS7466R and SPI port to use either SPIO or SPI1 Figure 15 15 shows the Device Properties window 25 Device Properties PWM RTC 051305 Dallas 1305 Real Time Clock Variable Names Figure 15 15 Click LS7466R using the key click the SPI port and click ox The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties window will now list the LS7466R and the SPI ports as installed devices Click the LS7466R in the device list A PROPERTIES button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 15 16 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 132 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support a PLC ON A
80. as integers based on the resolution of the analog input The on board analog inputs of the PLC on a Chip are 10 bit resolution and the integer values that represent the signal ranges from 0 to 1023 As the ladder diagram scans it reads the analog signal level and digitizes it and converts it into an integer that represents it For example if the analog input signal can range from 0 5VDC then the integer repre sentation at OV would be approximately O and at 5V would be approximately 1023 This integer number can then be scaled in the ladder diagram into engineering units The integer representation of the analog input is typically zero at the lower end OV OmA etc and 1023 at the high end of the scale 5VDC 20mA The highest allowed for the analog input resolution is hardware dependent 10 bit 1023 12 bit 4095 15 bit 32767 There are two ways to achieve analog input functionality in the EZ LADDER Toolkit hardware target One way is to add supported SPI bus analog input devices integrated circuits This requires additional hardware circuitry and interfacing See Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support for a list of the supported devices The second is to use any on board analog input on the hardware target Of course the hardware target must already support these analog inputs which is product and model specific Analog Input Installation Configuration Some hardware targets require analog inputs to be installed and prior to
81. as warranted or at its sole option refund to Licensee a prorated share of the license fee paid by Licensee for the portion of the EZ LADDER Toolkit which caused the alleged breach of warranty Licensee acknowledges that the foregoing represents Divelbiss s sole obligation and Licensee s sole remedy for any alleged breach of warranty regardingthe EZ LADDER Toolkit Divelbiss expressly disclaims any and all warranties concerning any Resulting Products and any applications developed tested installed or distributed by Licensee using the Licensed Software and Licensee expressly ac knowledges that it is solely responsible for any and all Resulting Products and applications developed tested installed or distributed using the Licensed Software and for any and all claims damages settlements expenses and attorney s fees arising from the distribution or use of the PLC ON A CHIP Kernel or Resulting Products by Licensee Licensee s customers or others DIVELBISS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT 6 Licensee Warranties d Licensee represents warrants and covenants that Licensee has all necessary authority to enter into and to fulfill its obligations under this Agreement Licensee will comply with all fede
82. clock The time is set by using variables to apply values to each of the inputs The enable EN must be true for the SETTIME function to be enabled The Q output is true when the function is enabled The HR input sets the hour of the day HR 0 23 the MN input sets the minutes 0 59 and the SC sets the seconds 0 59 The HR MN and SEC inputs must be connected to Integer variables Input Output Connections The SETTIME function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and MN four output pins Q HR MN SEC Type Integer Res Boolean Timer Active State ma Ameme sc fom p fx Example Circuit Related Functions SETDATE GETTIME GETDATE Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 205 Chapter 22 Function Reference SHL Description The SHL function provides a left bit shift of the P1 input The P2 input specifies the num ber of one bit left shifts If the enable EN is false the function is disabled If the enable EN is true the output O will be equal result of the left shifted input in integer form 1 2 4 8 16 32 Ashift left when the output is 32 will cause the output to be zero bit is shifted off Zeros are always shifted on to the right side when a left shift occurs Input Output Connections The SHL function block placement requires connections of 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O EN Out
83. construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Ohio U S A without regard to its conflict of laws provisions Exclusive venue for any legal action between the Parties arising out of or related to this Agreement or the subject matter hereof will be in the state or federal courts located or having jurisdiction in Knox County Ohio U S A which the Parties expressly acknowledge to have personal jurisdiction over them The 1980 UN Convention on the International Sale of Goods CISG will not apply hereto No waiver by either party of a breach of this Agreement shall operate or be construed as a waiver of any subsequent breach The invalidity illegality or unenforceability of any provision of this Agreement shall not affect the remainder of the Agreement and this Agreement shall be construed and reformed without such provision provided that the ability of neither party to obtain substantially the bargained for performance of the other shall have thereby been impaired All notices consents and other communications between the parties shall be in writing and shall be sent by i first class mail certified or registered return receipt requested postage prepaid ii electronic facsimile transmission iii overnight courier service iv telegram or telex or v messenger to the respective addresses that the parties may provide Licensee shall be deemed an independent contractor hereunder and as such shall not be deemed nor hold itself
84. controllers based on PLC on a Chip Enhanced Baby Bear PCS XXX etc are configured based on the part number For details on specific targets please see Chapter 20 Hardware Targets The Serial Print is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the PRoPERTIES button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find Serial Print Figure 11 1 shows the Device Properties window a Device Properties Dallas 1305 Real Time Clock Serial Print SPI Slave SPI Bus 0 SPI Bus 1 551 Bus Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 85 Chapter 11 Serial Printing Support Click Serial Print and click The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties window will now list the Serial Print as an installed device Click the Serial Print in the device list The PROPERTIES button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 11 2 ad PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X m Figure 11 2 Click the PRoPERTIES button The Serial Properties dialog box will open In this dialog box
85. dialog is opened to select the PWM channel and the Q polarity of the PWM Channel Controlling the PWM Channel Duty Cycle The PWM outputs duty cycle is controlled the PWM function block for that channel Changing the value of the variable connected to the DC input of the PWM function block immediately changes the duty cycle accordingly This gives a PWM output the ability to change duty cycle in real time in response to control parameter changes CHI PST Duty DC Figure 8 3 Changing the PWM Frequency In addition to an adjustable duty cycle the PWM clock frequencies CLK A CLK B can be changed in the ladder diagram project by use of the PWM FREQ function block The PWM FREQ function block has two inputs EN for enable and F for frequency and one output Q When the EN is true the PWM channel frequency is changed to the value of the variable connected to the F input of the function block Figure 8 4 illustrates a sample circuit using PWM FREQ When using the FREQ to change the frequency the actual CLK A or CLK B frequency is changed This affects all channels that use that specific CLK signal For example if PWM channel uses CLK A and PWM channel 2 uses CLK A then adjusting the frequency using PWM FREQ to CLK A affects all the PWM channels that use CLK A in this case 0 and 2 respectively Q When placing the PWM FREQ function block a new dialog is opened to select the PWM channel Clock The PWM clock frequency
86. function block the LS7366R must be configured for the application It is configured in the Project Settings A description of the configuration will follow later in this function block explanation The LS7366R operates using internal registers There are three registers in the LS7366R OTR DTR and Actual Count Per the design of the LS7366R the actual count register can never be directly read or written to therefore the other registers must be used to read and write to the actual count As an example when the function block Read Count RC input is true the actual count is copied to the OTR register and then the OTR registers is output at the function blocks count CT output DTR is used to set the count value and may be used as a comparison see LFLAG DFLAG The first step is to configure the LS7366R While targets may differ slightly this configu ration is found by clicking the Menu then Project Settings Look for a button LS7366R Properties Clicking this button will open the LS7366R Device Properties Window In this window configure the LS7366R for the type of application type of counting along with op tional settings LS7366R Device Properties Window ub 1573668 Device Properties SPI Port SPI CS Output GPO17 Quadrature Mode Count mode Index Mode Non quadrature A CLK B DIR Freedunning Disable index Asynchronous Index 1 Single cycle Load CNTR Synchronous Index R
87. gram workspace where the object is to be inserted and left click This places the object at that point As you add objects variables may need created See earlier in this chapter for how to create variables Figure 5 7 illustrates the placement of a Direct Contact and Direct Coil Please refer to Chapter 22 Func tion Reference Q The last placed object stays selected until a different object or button in the tool bar is chosen This feature allows an object be placed multiple times without the need of re selecting the object Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 48 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects To place an object or function there must be enough space in the ladder diagram workspace at the point of insertion If there is insufficient space an error message will display EZ EZ Ladder Standard EZ Ladderi Wie e e a s o EZ File Edit View Project Reports Window Help tae amp t Edit Inst ie C MON 4 CTU CTUD TOF MotorStart Placed Direct Coil Figure 5 7 Refer to Figure 5 7 note when placing objects near the left or right power rails links are automatically drawn to the power rails This also applies when variables are inserted next to functions the links are automatically drawn from the inserted variable to the function To finish the circuit shown in Figure 5 7 it wil
88. is always considered an input in the total number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used OX Ad NENNEN NENNEN NEN _ Number of inputs is dynamic Example Circuit Related Functions SUB MULT DIV Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 213 Chapter 22 Function Reference AND AND Description EN Q The AND functions provides a bitwise AND function of the P1 and P2 inputs The enable EN must be true for the AND function to be enabled The Q output is true when the AND function is enabled Input Output Connections P O0 The AND function block placement requires connections of three input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O P worm type integer Rest Boolean Timer ActiveState Other Deras ma X wme mt X Loo f mwe P x _ j om Le ow x jj d 0C Example Circuit CR Related Functions OR NOT XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 214 Chapter 22 Function Reference AVG AVG Description EN Q The AVG function averages all the inputs Px together and outputs this number O The number of inputs is specified when the function is placed in the program The enable EN must be true for the AVG function to be enabled The Q output is true when the AVG
89. is entered using numeric keypad buttons These numeric buttons are temporarily stored in the keypad buffer KB When Enter is pressed the KB 15 transferred stored in the variable connected to the output KO The output Q is true for the ladder diagram scan in which the ENTER was pressed Pressing the clear button on the keypad erases the buffer KB The MI input specifies the minimum value allowed to be entered on the keypad while the MA input specifies the maximum value allow to be entered on the keypad Input Output Connections The KEYPAD function block placement requires connections of three input pins EN MI MA and three out put pins Q KB KO worm type Integer Rest Boolean Timer ActiveState Other Detais en ma X 1 o mk X x wma X X Cd ef owe Example Circuit KEYPADI EN MinVal MI Buffer 4 Output Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 292 Chapter 22 Function Reference LATCH COIL LATCH COIL Description XL The LATCH coil operates similar to the DIRECT COIL except when true energized it will remain energized until a true is seen on the UNLATCH coil LATCH and UNLATCH coils work as pairs Any boolean variable can be used as a LATCH UNLATCH coil Example Circuit CHI L CHI Related Fun
90. list which is due and payable upon delivery of same b If Licensee fails to make any payment when due Divelbiss may at its sole option terminate Licensee s rights under this Agreement to use the Licensed Software If Licensee fails to pay any balance within thirty 30 days after being notified by Divelbiss that payment is overdue Divelbiss may take whatever steps it deems necessary to collect the balance including referring the matter to an agency and or suing for collection All expenses and fees associated with the collection of an overdue balance including costs and fees of collection and attorney s fees shall be paid by Licensee Overdue balances are subject to a monthly finance charge equal to the greater of 1 5 or the maximum interest rate permitted by law times the unpaid balance 4 Reporting a Upon request of Divelbiss Licensee will provide a written report each quarter showing the number of Resulting Products produced distributed or sold by Licensee during the previous calendar quarter the parties identified by name address etc to which they were distributed or sold and the revenue received therefor b Divelbiss shall be entitled to commission or to conduct an audit of Licensee s books and records twice per year in order to verify the accuracy of reports regarding resulting Products made by Licensee to Divelbiss Such audit shall be conducted during regular business hours at Licensee s facilities and Licensee shall
91. of samples to give the best suited reaction time and to use the least amount of RAM needed accomplish to meet the operation specifications Figure 19 4 illustrates an analog input being averaged by the MAVG function block Figure 19 4 Scaling Analog Input Readings It is often desirable to scale analog input reading to match the range of some control parameter such as pressure etc An analog input reading can be converted to another scale by using some math and conver sion function blocks For scaling to operate properly the analog input sensor must be sized correctly or the scaled analog input will not truly represent the range of operation Simple Scaling If the analog input and sensor are sized accordingly analog input 0 5VDC and the sensor 0 100 PSI then scaling is a simple matter It is recommended that averaging be used prior to converting to any scale Figure 19 5 illustrates a simple scaling circuit taking the analog input averaging it and then converting it as above 0 100 PSI to represent 0 5VDC on the analog input It uses this formula Scaled Reading Analog Input Reading Max Resolution X Max Scale in this case Scaled Reading ANO 1023 0 X 100 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 156 Chapter 19 Analog Inputs MAYG1 REAL DIY 1 TempVat Pl ANI Scal P Figure 19 5 Advanced Scaling If the analog input and sensor are designed with a range that does not
92. out to be an agent or employee of Divelbiss Under no circumstances shall any of the employees of a party hereto be deemed to be employees of the other party for any purpose This Agreement shall not be construed as authority for either party to act for the other party in any agency or other capacity or to make commitments of any kind for the account of or on behalf of the other except to the extent and for the purposes provided herein LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS
93. power interruption on the hardware target When power is restored retentive variable values are automati cally read from the non volatile memory and re loaded into their original variable Retentive variables are used often to recover from a power interruption and continue the process that is be ing controlled without initializing the process or wasting materials The hardware target must support Retentive Variables for this feature to work Adding retentive variables to a ladder diagram project alone does not guarantee retentive functionality How to Make a Variable Retentive For a variable to be retentive it must be identified as retentive To identify a variable as retentive in the Edit Mode click the Edit Vars button located on the tool bar Select the variable that is to be retentive Click the EDIT button The Edit Variable dialog will appear as in Figure 7 1 aJ Edit Variable Sear Name Description Variable Type Input Number Output Default Value Internal Check box to make variable Retentive retentive Figure 7 1 To make the variable retentive click the Retentive check box and click The variable is now retentive and will be stored in the event of a power interruption provided the actual target supports the retentive feature The same check box is present when creating a new variable Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 65 Chap
94. real world outputs are set for their state true false to their new state true false Rung 1 is scanned from Left to Each additional rung is Right Setting any internal scanned left to right in order variables immediately and internal variables are set Figure 3 8 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 29 CHAPTER 4 Configuring Targets This chapter provides basic information and steps required to identify select and configure hardware targets actual hardware controllers or PLCs in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents Understanding Targets 31 The Project Settings 31 Target Tab Settings 32 Version 22 33 Options Tab SC NGS 34 Selecting the Hardware 34 Viewing Target Information ense nennen nnn nnn 35 Updating Installing Target Kernels 36 APOC dq i e ETE 37 When Unable to Connect to the Target 37 When Able to Connect to the Target sees 39 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 4 Configuring Tar
95. start at zero as in the previous ex ample The analog input reading is still scalable but requires a more complex formula See Figure 19 6 It will take an analog input and scale it to 50 to 250 PSI It uses this formula Scaled Reading Analog Input Reading Max Resolution X Range Max Range Min Range Min in this case Scaled Reading ANO 1023 0 X 250 50 50 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 157 Chapter 19 Analog Inputs 1 REAL ANO lew EN Q BEN R ANO 1 R Oje RTemp2 4 RTemp R 1023 P2 MinRnge P2 ADD EN Q RTemp3 amp eP1 s ScaledOut MinFing P2 Figure 19 6 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 158 CHAPTER 20 Hardware Targets This chapter provides detailed information for hardware targets including supported func tions and features for each as well as specific information needed to use hardware fea tures Chapter Contents PLC on a Chip Integrated Circuits ceres 161 mae sil Lupa p er 161 2 2 900K 162 PLCHIP M2 2562X PLCHIP M2 2563X _ 163 Be Sl 2 5 1200 RENE 164 PLC Chip Modules iiio tipi aiu np en
96. that can be controlled in such a manner that will cause a device connected to have varying operation Consider a light dimmer changing the knob changes the light intensity this is how a PWM output can affect a load such as a light PWM does what its name implies By turning a PWM output on at a fast rate the load device will appear to be on all the time even though it is actually being turned on and off quickly The rate at which the PWM output is turned on and off is called the frequency As the frequency changes faster or slower the result on the load device changes like the light example from bright to dim The PWM outputs a square wave and the time on vs the time off is the duty cycle Figure 8 1 illustrates an example PWM output waveform Frequency 1 Freq Freq 50 Duty Cycle 2 50 3 75 Duty Duty Cycle Cycle PWM OUTPUT CHANNEL Figure 8 1 PWM Output Basics Pulse Width Modulation PWM Outputs are easy implement and utilize using the EZ LADDER Toolkit PWM channels may be selected and configured with 8 bit or 16 bit resolution When configured as 8 bit resolution up to 8 total channels are supported When configured as 16 bit resolution up to 4 channels are supported LADDER Toolkit provides the basic programmability the hardware target must support PWM and the PWM functionality supported types and number of channels is always target dependent While EZ selected configuration for the PWM outputs to operate correctly
97. type integer Real Boolean Timer ActiveState Other Details E ma X Cater N Lo om x OX foe d d d LL Example Circuit CRI gt EN Q Numi P2 Related Functions gt lt lt lt gt Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 242 Chapter 22 Function Reference HIGH SPD TMR HIGH SPD TMR Description The HIGH SPD TMR is a 100 microsecond resolution timer When the IN detects a rising edge transition the timer resets and begins timing from zero When the IN detects a falling edge transition the timer latches the current timer value CV holds the current elapsed time when the timer is timing and the latched elapsed timer value when the timer stops tim CY ing The output will be in 100 microsecond increments as an integer Example if the CV is 1000 then the actual time would be 100 milliseconds Input Output Connections The HIGH_SPD_TMR function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and two output pins Q CV oww ow j d Example Circuit CRI 3H SPD TM Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 243 Chapter 22 Function Reference HYSTER HYSTER Description EN RQ The HYSTER provides hysteresis into a control loop When the actual A is greater than the rise R then output RQ is true and FQ is false When
98. variable types and addresses prior to coding to ensure that variable size and types are accounted for Variable 1 Address Boolean 2 Variable 2 Address Integer 4 Variable 3 Address Boolean 2 bytes uses location 0 and 1 bytes uses location 2 3 4 and 5 bytes uses location 6 and 7 EEPROMJADDRESS LOCATION Verable amp Type Sion 2 5 Variable 1 Boolean 4 C Verwezen _ Variable 3 Boolean Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 239 Chapter 22 Function Reference Example Circuit CH PROM WRIT Related Functions EEPROM READ Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 236 Chapter 22 Function Reference F TRIG TRIG Description CLK The F TRIG is a function that may be used to trigger another function on the falling edge of a transition When the CLK detects a true to false transition the output Q is energized for one scan of the program only Input Output Connections The F TRIG function block placement requires connections of one input pin CLK and one output pin Q worm Type Integer Rea Boolean Timer Active State Other Details Lak ma wu metres Example Circuit CRI F_TRIG1 INTEGER Timing Diagram I N Program Scan Time 7 Related Functions R TRIG Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit
99. 00 Features Hardware Counter EEPROM Storage Real Time Clock Retentive Variables Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME Hardware Counter CNTRTMR High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 173 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets ICM EBB 400 Features Hardwar
100. 2 6 If the Output Window is not visible and an error is detected during a compilation the Output Window will be reset to a visible state to announce the error Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 23 3 Ladder Diagram Basics This chapter provides detailed information on understanding the origin of ladder diagrams as they relate to original relay logic basic ladder diagram symbols power rails links types of circuit connections and ladder diagram functionality Chapter Contents Relay Logic vs Ladder Diagram 25 Basic Ladder Diagram 26 CONTACTS MR 26 Gro qe n 26 POWER Rails cse m 27 Power Ralls a 27 E T 27 FY BOS RM EEEE ANENE EEEREN ESNEA EENENEE 28 Understanding Ladder Diagram Functionality 29 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 3 Ladder Diagram Basics Relay Logic vs Ladder Diagram Prior to the invention of the Programmable Logic Controller PLC control panels consisted of large num bers of relays motor starters and other devices wired to create the required functionality To
101. 2X E Figure 14 3 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 104 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking Click the PRoPERTIES button The OptiCAN Properties dialog box will open This dialog box is used to configure the controller on an OptiCAN Network Figure 14 4 show the OptiCAN Properties dialog box The following items must be configured 1 CAN Port Using the drop down menu select the physical CAN port that will be connected to the OptiCAN network All available CAN ports are displayed 2 Node ID The Node ID serves as the controller s address on the network It may be numbered up to the maximum number of nodes allowed All Node IDs on an OptiCAN Network must be unique Duplicate Node IDs will result in communication errors or communication loss a variable This variable must be configured as node 255 The vari able integer value then becomes the OptiCAN node ID It is important to keep this ID number in the proper range Q The node ID may also be set from the ladder diagram project using 3 Broadcast Rate The rate that the controller will broadcast registers is entered here in milliseconds This timing requirement should be identified during network planning Node Status 190 Tx Erors Rx Errors Figure 14 4 In addition to the parameters listed above that are required the following additional configuration p
102. 6 107 109 110 O 6 0 1 0 1 0 1 4 0 4 o fo 2 50 os E SN o E SN EN E Lj 0 EA o0 0 h h kpA kpA kpA kPa kPa kpA kPa 4 5 4 4 6 P S P S P S P S p S C x S C F P S p S A A P S O D gt O1 gt List Continued Next Page Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 249 Q D e B N N Tl 5 5 29 s 9 B 5 sie sm E Start Offset Exhaust Gas Temperature 65270 16 40 0 03125 Fuel Temperature 6526 8 1 a S a S h Percent Torque At Idle Point 1 6525 Percent Torque At Point 2 6525 6525 6525 1 0 0 0007813 0 rpm _0_ 0 541 Percent Torque At Point 3 542 Percent Torque At Point 4 543 6525 544 Reference Engine Torque 6525 545 Gain KP of Endspeed Governor 6525 6144 6526 Percent Torque At Point 5 NO CoO lo R Ol Ib ft jo rpm Co O 0 974 1134 Remote Accelerator NO 65262 ms Average Fuel Economy 68266 16 32 0001953125 mes
103. 841 12 Bit Analog to Digital A D Converter The ADS 78441 is a 12 bit Analog to Digital Converter integrated circuit with an SPI interface EZ LADDER Toolkit has built in software support for using this device on an SPI port The ADS7841 is a hardware device and requires additional circuitry and knowledge to interface it an EZ LADDER supported target At this time only PLC on a Chip or custom targets support the use of the ADS7841 A D Converter This chapter discusses the basics of using the ADS7841 in the ladder diagram and minor references to hardware when needed Installing the ADS7844 in the Ladder Diagram Project To be able to use the ADS7841 in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project the ADS7841 must first be installed and configured As the PLC on a Chip is the most commonly used target for the ADS7841 it will be used as an example to install and configure the ADS7841 The ADS 7841 is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the PRoPERTIESs button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find ADS7841 and SPI port to use
104. 94 Chapter 13 Modbus Networking ad Modbus Setup Slave ID PTL ASC Comm Mode Data Bits Baud Rate 19200 Packet Transmit Delay Bs Character Times Figure 13 1 Modbus Slave Registers As identified earlier Modbus is a register based communications protocol All communication between master and slave devices is through individual registers EZ LADDER Toolkit supports four types of Modbus Slave registers Coil Discrete Input Input and Holding registers Each type of register has specific use and requirements Coil Registers Coils registers are registers that are written to by the Master Using these registers the master can directly control coils located in the ladder diagram project internal or real world Coil Register numbers range from MB 10001 through MB 20000 Discrete Input Registers Discrete Input registers are registers that are read directly by the Master Using these registers the master can directly monitor the status of contacts located in the ladder diagram project internal or real world Discrete Input Register numbers range from MB 20001 through MB 30000 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 95 Chapter 13 Modbus Networking Input Registers Input registers are registers that may be read by the Master but can only be written to by the slave itself Using these registers the slave can set data that the master can view but not mo
105. Apply power to the hardware target If the time has elapsed repeat steps 6 8 again The hardware target will now allow bootloader operations other buttons are now active 9 Choose the correct option to try and resolve your target issue Bootloader Bootloader will open the bootloader dialog box for updating kernels Erase LD Program Erases the ladder diagram project from the hardware target s memory In the event the program is hanging and preventing a normal connection this will erase the program to allow a normal connect Restart Target Causes the hardware target to reboot This is required when all other bootloader actions have been completed Without the restart the kernel will still not connect normally Using the Restart Target is the same as resetting the power to the Q hardware target Both will cause the target to restart and operate normally Close Closes the dialog box Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 38 Chapter 4 Configuring Targets When Able to Connect to the Target If you can connect normally to the target there are only a few additional utilities available in the EZ LADDER Toolkit 1 the target is connected to normally press the F11 key on your computer s keyboard The Device Properties dialog box will appear as in Figure 4 7 Device Properties m Target Date 00 00 00 0 Sync w PC Target Time 00 00 00 EE Erase User PC Date 09 02 2009 Program 10
106. CAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 186 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC HMI 2X E R Features OptiCAN Networking RS232 422 485 Serial Port Programmable Buttons LEDS Retentive Variables Modbus Slave Programmable Beeper EEPROM Storage Serial Printing Display Heater 41939 Communications 2x16 Large Font Display Optional Expansion Features Up to 4 PWM Capable Outputs 12 bit DAC Outputs Quadrature Counter Type K Thermocouple Inputs 10 bit Analog Input 5V 10V 20mA Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Maximum MAX Less Than Equal To lt Minimum MIN Not Equal To lt gt Modulo MOD Equal To Multiplication MULT EEPROM Read EEPROM READ OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Greater Than gt Quadrature Counter CNTR LS7366R Greater Than Equal To gt Bitwise NOT NOT Absolute Value ABS Bitwise O
107. Column 2x40 2 Row 40 Column and 4x20 4 Row 20 Column All supported displays use the HD44780 standard EZ LADDER Toolkit sup ports only one LCD display in a ladder diagram project Configuring the LCD Display in the Project Settings To be able to use an LCD display in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project the LCD display must first be installed and configured As the PLC on a Chip is the most commonly used target for LCD dis plays it will be used as an example to install and configure an LCD display The LCD display is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the properties button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find LCD Figure 9 1 shows the Device Properties window a Device Properties KEYPAD Keypad 32 Bit Quadrature Counter Divelbiss OptiCAN PWM Pulse Width Modulation RTC DS1305 Dallas 1305 Real Time Clock Variable Names Figure 9 1 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 74 Chapter 9 LCD Display Support Click LCD and click The Device Propert
108. Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 194 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PCS 2X0 Features Real Time Clock Optional Multipurpose Serial Port OptiCAN Networking Retentive Variables Modbus Slave J1939 Communications EEPROM Storage Serial Printing Gray Scale SSI Encoder Port HDIO Expansion Bus Hardware Counter Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Grey Scale Encoder GC 551 Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_ TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising E
109. Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Bit Addressable Variables As covered earlier in this chapter variables are an important part of an EZ LADDER Toolkit project While most projects will use variables as described earlier the EZ LADDER Toolkit also provides a feature to use integer variables and then actually control the individual bits that make up the entire integer variable num ber total of 32 bits per integer This feature is called Bit Addressable Variables Any integer may be used as a bit addressable variable As a bit addressable variable each variable has 32 individual bits that are numbered 0 31 and each bit represents the binary bit of the total integer variable number To understand bit addressable variables you must have a basic understanding of the binary num bering system where numbers are created using ones and zeros in specific placeholder bits that represent an actual number 6 5 2 4 3 Placeholder 64 3 6 8 1 a Bit Number 0 31 Add the placeholder numbers of bits with 1 s only 8 4 1 13 Binary Bits The integer variable value would be 13 Setting the bit of a Variable To set the bit of an integer variable identify or create the variable In addition to the variable that will be bit addressable the one you just identified additional variables will be required to write to the bits of the origi nal bit addressable variable one for each bit that you intend to use These additi
110. Divelbiss in order to secure perfect or protect the rights of Divelbiss in the Licensed Software or Confidential Information as hereinafter defined 11 Confidentiality Except as expressly provided in this Agreement Licensee shall not disclose or permit disclosure to any third parties the Licensed Software including object code source code and documentation or any other confidential information provided by Divelbiss Confidential Information Further Licensee will use all reasonable precautions and take all steps necessary to prevent any Confidential Information from being acquired in whole or in part by any unauthorized party will use Confidential Information solely in furtherance of this Agreement and will permit access to any Confidential Information only by those employees of Licensee with a legitimate need to know In the event that Licensee learns or has reason to believe that Confidential Information has been disclosed or is at risk of being disclosed to any unauthorized party Licensee will immediately notify Divelbiss thereof and will cooperate fully with Divelbiss in seeking to protect Divelbiss s rights in the Confidential Information 12 Term and Termination a b f This Agreement shall remain in effect from the date it is accepted until terminated as provided below Divelbiss may terminate this Agreement and all license rights hereunder upon the occurrence of any of the following i Licensee fails to cur
111. Due to PWM frequency stepping limitations not all frequencies are attainable therefore a desired frequency is entered and the actual frequency that will be used closest match is displayed Dependent upon which channels are installed either CLK A or CLK B frequencies must be entered CLK A and CLK B operate identical except for which channels they control Once all the channels have been installed and configured click to close the PWM Properties window The PWM is now configured and ready to be used in the ladder diagram Controlling PWM in the Ladder Diagram Project With PWM channels configured in the Project Settings it is simple to control the actual PWM channels in the ladder diagram project Enabling a PWM Channel To control a PWM output specifically when it is enabled disabled and it s duty cycle the PWM function block is used This function block has two inputs EN for Enable and DC for Duty Cycle and also has one output Q When the PWM function block is enabled the EN input is true the PWM channel is active and operating at the frequency defined in the project settings and the Duty Cycle variable connected to DC of the PWM function block When the EN input is false the PWM channel output is disabled Figure 8 3 illus trates the PWM function block in a sample circuit Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 71 Chapter 8 Pulse Width Modulation When placing the PWM function block a new
112. EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Clear Display SI CLRDISP Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER 4 Digital Outputs 4 Programmable LEDs Hardware Counter Real Time Clock 4 Digit Numeric Display 2 Programmable Push Buttons Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Write to Display 51 DISP Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 198 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets 51 110 Features EEPROM Storage 4 Multifunction I O 1 Programmable LED Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt
113. EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O The EN is always considered an input in the total number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used P Worm Type Integer Res Boolean Timer Active Sate Other Dorais ow OX o eme oma X X __ _Narberofinputsis owe x x j i owej jJ X jJ jo ooo Example Circuit Related Functions MIN Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 261 Chapter 22 Function Reference MIN MIN Description EN The MIN function compares all the Px input values and outputs the smalled of them on the O Output The number of inputs is specified when the object is placed The enable EN must be true for the MAX function to be enabled P1 0 Input Output Connections The MIN function block placement requires connections of at least 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O The EN is always considered an input in the total number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used Type Integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Other Dorais ow fT XT treme ot X X A ow owej jJ X jJ jo o ooo Example Circuit Related Functions MAX Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 262 Chapter 22 Function Reference MOD
114. EN must be true for the GREATER THAN function to be enabled Input Output Connections The GREATER THAN function block placement requires connections of at least 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and one output pin Q The EN is always considered an input in the total number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used worm Type Integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Other Dorais E ma TT X A amp wme o o Lom oma X OX Pd dC otras nario ea fom Example Circuit Related Functions gt lt lt lt gt Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 241 Chapter 22 Function Reference GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO gt GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO Description The GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO provides an if greater than or equal to comparison for the Px inputs The number of inputs is specified when the object is placed The output Q is true if P1 is greater than or equal to P2 and P2 is greater than or equal to P3 and so on The enable EN must be true for the GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO function to be enabled Input Output Connections The GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO function block placement requires connections of at least 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and one output pin Q The EN is always considered an input in the total number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used worm
115. ER Related Functions REAL BOOLEAN TIMER Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 245 Chapter 22 Function Reference INVERTED COIL INVERTED COIL Description A The INVERTED COIL is a representation of an internal boolean variable output coil or an actual hardware real world output Its normal state is true or normally energized An inter nal INVERTED COIL may also be referred to as a control relay CR If there is power flow to the INVERTED COIL then it will be false off If there is no power flow to the INVERTED COIL then it will be true on The INVERTED COIL may only be placed in the last column Example Circuit CHI CR3 Related Functions DIRECT COIL DIRECT CONTACT INVERTED CONTACT Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 246 Chapter 22 Function Reference INVERTED CONTACT INVERTED CONTACT Description The INVERTED CONTACT is a representation of an internal boolean variable input or an B actual hardware real world input Its normal state is true or normally energized An inter nal INVERTED CONTACT may also be referred to as a control relay CR A false condition on the input if internal coil is true for internal contacts or real world input is false then the contact will allow power flow and devices located to the right of the DIRECT CONTACT may operate A true on it s coil or real world input will result in it s contacts to not allow power flow
116. Edit Variables Dialog Variables are created edited and deleted Vars using this dialog box Inst Insert Variables Clicking in the ladder diagram workspace inserts a variable in that location Vars The inserted variable is selected from a dialog box that opens Ue Verify Program Verifies the ladder diagram and elements are complete and do not break rules This is automatically done when the compie button is clicked Compile Program This does an automatic verify and then compiles the ladder diagram C project for the specific hardware target controller Monitor Mode This changes the EZ LADDER workspace from the Edit Mode to the Monitor MON Mode The Monitor Mode is where ladder diagram projects are downloaded to and monitored on targets Abc Insert Comment This inserts a comment block into the ladder diagram project 4 Direct Contact This inserts a Direct Contact Normally Open Contact into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click Negated Contact This inserts a Negated Contact Normally Closed Contact into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click 4th Direct Coil This inserts a Direct Coil Normally Open Coil into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click Can only be placed in last column i Negated Coil This inserts a Negated Coil Normally Closed Coil into the ladder diagram project workspace wherever you click Can only be placed in last column Divelbiss
117. Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Clear Display SI CLRDISP Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER 2 Digital Outputs 1 External Analog Input 2 Internal Analog Inputs Pots Retentive Variables 4 Digit Numeric Display 2 Programmable Push Buttons Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Write to Display 51 DISP Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 200 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets Micro Bear Controller
118. Grey Scale Encoder GC 551 Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Counter Quadrature CNTR LS7366R Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Keypad KEYPAD Latching Coil LATCH EEPROM Storage LCD Clear LCD CLEAR LCD Print LCD PRINT Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL oet Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 168 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLCMOD M2 25620X PLCMOD M2 25630X All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Usin
119. H n n n 11 itd sck 1 I Iil I 1 I MOSI 1 Ip E 0 gt lt Wii MISO 11 0x00 IX 10x00 gt PK oxo 0x0 E Pre 1 i READ 13 t4 t5 11 SS 1 E ENN aM BE SCK I 1 1 MOSI 1 ICTRL15 8 XX CTRL7 0 Care It tol MISO 1 0x00 DATA 31 24 DATA 23 16 DATA 15 8 DATA 7 0 1 ttl 11 WRITE 213 t4 t5 0g 001 1 SS 1 1 ENN SCK MOSI MISO 0x00 I I 1 All Detailed Communications Timing Diagrams are shown using ACTIVE HIGH SCK 2 11 t2 t3 and min 1 2 SCK tb min 508 4 t6 min 1mS Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support SPI Bus Devices EZ LADDER Toolkit provides built in support for the use of several SPI devices These supported devices are easily integrated with PLC on a Chip and used via EZ LADDER Toolkit variables and function blocks Generally these devices are installed and configured using the Project Settings and are not supported on all targets 057
120. H2Enabled Variable Name CH3 Enabled Variable Name Figure 15 11 Click close the ADS8341 Device Properties click to close the ADS8341 Properties and click to close the PLC on a Chip target settings dialog and click ox again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project With the device properly interface and connected to the target the analog input readings will be available as variables in the EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project DAC7612 12 Bit Digital to Analog D A Converter The DAC7612 is a 12 bit Digital to Analog Converter integrated circuit with an SPI interface EZ LADDER Toolkit has built in software support for using this device on an SPI port The DAC7612 is a hardware device and requires additional circuitry and knowledge to interface it an EZ LADDER supported target At this time only PLC on a Chip or custom targets support the use of the DAC7612 D A Converter This chapter discusses the basics of using the DAC7612 in the ladder diagram and minor references to hardware when needed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 129 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support Installing the DAC7612 in the Ladder Diagram Project To be able to use the DAC7612 in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project the DAC7612 must first be installed and configured As the PLC on a Chip is the most commonly used targe
121. HL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 185 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC 421X E R Features OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage 0 5VDC Analog Inputs x 4 16 bit 4 PWM Capable Outputs x 4 Output Current Feedback PWM Modbus Slave Hardware Counters 2 Channels J1939 Communications Serial Printing Retentive Variables Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM_ SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Optional Multipurpose Serial Port Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTI
122. M WRITE 235 E E 237 238 GETDATE secre case n 239 240 GREATER 241 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO gt 242 HIGH SPB TMR erate cea iem tionis cuni de 243 e 244 INTEGER e 245 INVERTED 246 INVERTED 247 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 209 Chapter 22 Function Reference J1939_SPN uoecccccsccceccecsececsessesessessesssessesucsesaesessesacsssesuesesseeaesessesassesaeeaeees 248 KEYPAD ccccssessececsessecssessesecsessesecsesuecussesaesessesaesnssessesessesassesateaesesateaeeess 252 LATCH COIL s cessessececseceececsessesecsesaesessessesecsessesesstsatsussestsirsteatsesseeaeeess 253 CLEAR o esssecsssessecessessescsessesessesaesessessesucsessestssesaesessesesusateaesessesaeeess 254 255 LESS THAN lt ccccsssssccessesesecseseesessesaesessesaesacsesaesesstsassessesaesusansaesesseeaesess 257 LESS THAN OR EQUAL lt ssssccsssessesecsesscsecsesscsessesscsensesecsersesecsess 258 259 MAVG cccsececcessesccessescsessesuesessesussesaesessesaesussesaesessesatsessestesessesesesatensseeaee 260
123. MOD Description EN d The MOD function calculates the modulo remainder of the division using the inputs P1 and P2 The P2 number should be greater than zero zero or less than zero will cause the function to return invalid data the output The enable EN must be true for the MOD func tion to be enabled P 0 P2 Input Output Connections The MOD function block placement requires connections of three input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O Pin Active State Other Details AWeme Output X Output Example Circuit Related Functions DIV Remainder 1 CEG T a NEN ot KENN Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 263 Chapter 22 Function Reference MULT MULT Description mU The MULT function multiplies all of the Px inputs together The number of inputs is speci fied when the object is placed The output O provides the result of the multiplication The enable EN must be true for the MULT function to be enabled P1 0 Input Output Connections The MULT function block placement requires connections of at least 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O The EN is always considered an input in the total number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used Type Integer Res Boolean Timer Active Sate Other Dorais om fT Xtreme ot X X __
124. Models Each Micro Bear Controller model supports different features and function blocks based on the base PLC on a Chip processor and different peripherals on board When any Micro Bear Model ICM MB XXX is selected in the Project Settings all the supported features and function blocks are installed automatically ICM MB 100 Features EEPROM Storage Hardware Counter 6 Digital Inputs 1 External Analog Input 2 Programmable LEDs Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER 4 Relay Outputs 2xDPDP 2xSPST Retentive Variables Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Set Date SETDATE
125. N sees a false to true transition AD provides the actual address to write to EEPROM and V is the actual value that is written Q is true when the write cycle has completed without error AD Q The same variable type that writes to the EEPROM location should be used to read the EEPROM location A memory map is recommended for organizing variables stored in EEPROM Writing to EEPROM is a relatively slow operation and this must be considered when cre ating the ladder diagram project as scan time can be affected during a write EEPROM storage area has a limited number of write cycles therefore it shouldn t be used to store data which changes often and must be re written often Writing often to the same location can cause the location to fail Input Output Connections The EEPROM WRITE function block placement requires connections of three input pins EN AD V and one output pin Q worm type Integer Real Boolean Timer ActiveState Oterbetals ma X Rising ese om mt X v pow OX OI XX om Each EEPROM address is absolute and is one byte in size Boolean variables fill two bytes while all other variable types fill four bytes of EEPROM When writing a boolean to address 0 the actual variable will use addresses 0 and 1 two bytes Should you write an integer variable into address 0 then it would use ad dresses 0 3 memory map should be created and used to assign
126. OptiCAN network operates based on preset and user defined registers The following are general reg ister assignments and information common for all OptiCAN enabled controllers For non controller devices please consult the product s data sheet for detailed register assignments and preset functions General Register Assignments These are the overall general register assignments common to all OptiCAN enabled devices Register Number Assigned Function Use 0 127 User Defined Controller Registers and I O Defined Registers 128 191 Common Broadcast Registers 192 255 Common Configuration and Command Registers User Defined registers for controllers are available for the user to define the use of during the ladder diagram project development Device Defined registers for I O and other devices have preset definitions of register use and cannot be changed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 106 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking Common Configuration Command Register Assignments These registers are pre assigned and cannot be altered These register s contents may only be modified by a controller and may only change its I O setting Register Number _ Description Read Write Node ID The node s ID Number Read Write Common Broadcast Register Assignments These registers are pre assigned and cannot be altered Register Number _ Read Write 250 249 248
127. PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 127 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find ADS8341 and SPI port to use either SPIO or SPI1 Figure 15 9 shows the Device Properties window a Device Properties 12 Bit 4 Channel A D Converter 16 Bit 4 Channel A D Converter Analog Block 0 ANO AN7 12 Bit 2 Channel D A Converter Onboard digital input 0 Onboard diaital input 1 Figure 15 9 Click ADS8341 using the key click the SPI port and click ox The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties window will now list the ADS8341 and the SPI ports as installed devices Click the ADS8341 in the device list A PRoPERTIES button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 15 10 ad PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X Sl IL 4 Channel Tih SS SPI Bus 0 Figure 15 10 The SPI port must be installed individually or no SPI ports will show available in later drop down configuration menus Click the PRoPERTIES button The ADS8341 Properties dialog box will open Click the app button A new dia log will open where you can select the properties required to communicate with this specific device Multiple SPI devices may be placed on the same SPI po
128. R LCD Print LCD PRINT Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 167 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLCMOD M2 25601X All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Using certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels PWM Outputs ADS7841 A D SPI Hardware Counter SPI Slave ADS8341 A D SPI HDIO Bus Synchronous Serial Interface SSI DAC7612 D A SPI Retentive Variables Serial Printing LS7366R CNTR SPI Keypad Support Modbus Slave Real Time Clock DS1305 SPI LCD Display Support Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt
129. R OR Addition ADD Pulse With Modulation PWM Bitwise AND AND Print to LCD LCD PRINT Average AVG PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Bit Pack BIT PACK Rising Edge Detect TRIG Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Real REAL Clear LCD LCD CLEAR Rotate Left ROL Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Rotate Right ROR Compare CMP Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Count Down CTD Select SEL Count Up CTU Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Count Up Down CTUD Shift Left SHL Division DIV Shift Right SHR Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Set Reset Set Dominant SR Falling Edge Detect TRIG Subtraction SUB High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Convert to Timer TIMER Hysteresis HYSTER Time Delay Off TOF Convert to Integer INTEGER Time Delay On TON J1939 Receive J1939 SPN Pulse Timer TP Latching Coil LATCH Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Limit LIMIT Bitwise XOR XOR Moving Average MAVG Indicates with an Expansion Option Installed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 187 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC HMI 4X E R Features OptiCAN Networking RS232 422 485 Serial Port Programmable Buttons LEDS Retentive Variables Modbus Slave Programmable Beeper EEPROM Storage Serial Printing Display Heater J1939 Communications 2x20 Display Optional Expansion Features Up to 4 PWM Capable Outputs 12 bit DAC Outputs Quadrature Counter Type K Thermocouple Inputs 10 bit Analog Input
130. S Example Circuit CHI AM Related Functions OPTICAN NODESTATUS Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 269 Chapter 22 Function Reference OR Description The OR function provides a bitwise OR function of the P1 and P2 inputs The enable EN must be true for the OR function to be enabled The Q output is true when the OR rid is enabled Input Output Connections The OR function block placement requires connections of 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O Active State Other Details Output Output Example Circuit Related Functions XOR AND NOT OP P o S o __ Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 270 Chapter 22 Function Reference PID PID Description The PID function provides an easy to use PID control algorithm Specific PID information is required when the function is placed as well as the PID inputs The Q is true when the function is enabled The CO Control Output is the output calculated by the PID The ER is the error calculation of the PID SP PV The PID function is defined by the difference Equation u n u n 1 Kp e n e n 1 Ki T e n Kd T e n 2 e n 1 e n 2 Where u n PID Output Kp Proportional Gain Ki Integral Gain Kd Derivative Gain e n Error Setpoint Process Variable T Sample Period 88 Pi
131. Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 201 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets ICM MB 110 Features EEPROM Storage Hardware Counter 4 Relay Outputs 2xDPDP 2xSPST 6 Digital Inputs 2 External Analog Inputs Retentive Variables 5 Programmable LEDs 3 Programmable Push Buttons 4 Digit Display Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Clear Display SI CLRDISP Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Lef
132. Settings Window Dialog box will open Figure 4 1 is an example of the Project Settings Window and identifies the main components of it Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 31 Chapter 4 Configuring Targets EZ Project Settings Enhanced Baby Bear 256K HEC 1000 Figure 4 1 Target Tab Settings 1 Project Setting Tabs 2 Serial Settings 3 Target List Description 4 Divelbiss Corporation Enhanced Baby Bear Divelbiss Corporation Harsh Environment PLC Mil 5 Divelbiss Corporation Harsh Environment PLC Divelbiss Corporation Harsh Environment PLC Divelbiss Corporation Harsh Environment Tm Select the appropriate tab to configure target settings Figure 4 1 represents the TARGET tab Figure 4 2 represents the VERSION tab and Figure 4 3 represents the OPTIONS tab Clicking on a tab selects the tab for viewing Select the serial port on the computer that will be used to communicate to the target These settings are used to connect download and monitor ladder diagram programs running in EZ LADDER s program run and monitor mode The baud rate for all hardware targets is hard coded and cannot be changed This is a list of all targets supported by your version of EZ LADDER Toolkit Click on the target name to select When selecting some targets an additional dialog may open This dialog is used to specifically select the targets model number i e selecting En
133. THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH LIABILITY OR THE AMOUNT A SINGLE USER LICENSE FEE FOR THE EZ LADDER TOOLKIT WHICHEVER IS GREATER 8 Indemnification a Subject to the limitations of Section 7 of this Agreement Divelbiss will indemnify Licensee from and against liability for any judgment finally awarded by a court of competent jurisdiction against Licensee based upon a claim that the EZ LADDER Toolkit infringes any current U S patent or copyright of a third party provided that Divelbiss is promptly notified of any such threats claims or proceedings afforded the opportunity to intervene in any such proceeding and given sole control over the defense of such claim including all negotiations of any prospective settlement or compromise and that Licensee gives all cooperation and assistance requested by Divelbiss in connection with same and provided further that the foregoing obligation of Divelbiss does not apply with respect to any Resulting Products or any hardware software including the Licensed Software or components thereof i not supplied by Divelbiss ii made or modified in whole or in part by Licensee or according to Licensee s specifications iii otherwise modified after delivery iv combined with other hardware software products or processes by Licensee including in creating Resulting Products where such claim could have been avoided absent such combination v insofar as Licensee continues allegedly infringing activi
134. The following are the selectable criteria items Input Output Internal Function Unused Variables Contacts Without Coils Coils Without Contacts Drum Sequencer Tables Retentive Variables and Network Address Registers After the required items are selected or deselected click This generates the viewable and printable report WINDOW MENU The WINDOW Menu is the basic Window s menu for viewing and controlling open application windows This menu is typically found in every Window s based program Since this functionality is based on Windows it will not be described in detail Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 18 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit HELP MENU The HELP Menu is useful to determine software versions and registration information Currently there is no active help built in to the EZ LADDER Toolkit About Opens the EZ LADDER Toolkit about dialog box The Toolkit version is displayed at the top of the dialog box The File Versions tab identifies versions of each of the EZ LADDER Toolkit components The License Information tab identifies the EZ LADDER Toolkit Serial Number and who it is registered to Splash Screen Opens the EZ LADDER Toolkit splash screen This screen is normally viewable for a few seconds when EZ LADDER Toolkit is started EZ LADDER Toolkit Tool Bars and Tool Bar Buttons The EZ LADDER Toolkit provides tool bars for many common functions for ease of use and t
135. The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find Low Power Mode Figure 21 1 shows the Device Properties window a Device Properties CD Li Low Power Mode Low Power Mode 32 Bit Quadrature Counter Divelbiss OptiCAN Variable Names Figure 21 1 Click Low Power Mode and click The Device Properties window will close and the previous target prop erties window will now list the Low Power Mode as an installed device Refer to Figure 21 2 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 205 Chapter 21 Low Power Mode a PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X Low ower Mode Figure 21 2 With the Low Power Mode installed Click on the Low Power Mode Device and a PROPERTIES button will appear to the right Click the PROPERTIES button to open the Low Power Properties dialog box Figure 21 3 shows the PROPERTIES but ton and Figure 21 4 shows the Low Power Properties dialog u PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X Devices Llecriptioi Low Power Mode Low Power Mode Figure 21 3 aJ Low Power Mode Properties Low Power Wakeup Pin Save Retentive Variables On Sleep Figure 21 4 Divelbi
136. Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 176 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets ICM EBB 700 Features Hardware Counter Real Time Clock J1939 Communications Retentive Variables HDIO Expansion Port OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage Modbus Slave Serial Printing Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Limit LIMIT Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Se
137. To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER 4 Digital Outputs 4 Programmable LEDs Hardware Counter Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 197 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets 51 200 Features Retentive Variables EEPROM Storage 4 Digital Inputs Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write
138. Type 1100 Harsh Environment Digital 1 0 Seral Humber 07240006 Configure Registers Broadcast Interval ms Figure 14 17 The CONFIGURE REGISTERS button is used to configure each register of the device including it s trigger and value coNFIGURE REGISTERS bu Configure Registers Number Mame Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Output Error Status Output Frequency Frequency B Pu Polarity Pw O Duty Cycle Pu 1 Cycle 2 Duty Cycle Pw 3 Duty Cycle tD C C tn a om Display tton to open the Configure Registers dialog box See Figure 14 18 Trigger Change of State Change of State na coo A Mone Mane Mane Mane Mane Mane oi 0 0 0 0 0 Decimal Hexadecimal 14 18 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 115 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking To change the Trigger for any register select the register and click the down arrow in the trigger column for that register This will open a small list of trigger options Each register maintains its own individual trigger setting See Figure 14 19 Configure Registers Mumber Mame Trigger Digital Inputs On Change of State Digital Outputs None Output Error Status Mane On Change of State Output Mode AL Specified Interval Pw Frequency Interval and Change of State Puy hd
139. When the EZ LADDER Toolkit is started it will open in the Edit Mode This mode is where ladder diagram projects are created functions are inserted and variables are placed When actually downloading ladder diagram projects to targets or monitoring ladder diagram operation on hardware targets it is referred to as Run Mode The Run Mode is explained in Chapter 6 Downloading and Running Projects Figure 2 1 identifies the components that are part of the Edit Mode 2 EZ Ladder Standard Ladder Diagram Project Name did lt 2 E File vidi erret etm morti 1 EA JMP Edit Inst k 1 5 Label Vara are ig C MON 4 i 4 CTU CTD CTUD TP TOF Insert Function A LJ Coils Contacts Functions 5 Variables i Labels 3 3 4 4 6 5 4 Figure 2 1 1 Project Filename The name of the currently viewed project will be displayed in this position 2 Menus Drop down menus for programming features and options 3 Cross Reference Quick Click Cross References for functions objects and variables 4 Tool Bars Tool bars for placing functions objects and drop down function lists 5 Ladder Workspace Area where the ladder diagram is drawn 6 Output Window This is where status messages are displayed when Verifying or Compiling ladder diagram programs Divelbiss Corporatio
140. _PRINT function block is rising edge sensitive Therefore it will only transmit one time as the ENable input goes high If data is required to be transmitted repeatedly it must be programmed into the ladder diagram project as part of the ENable control on the SERIAL PRINT function block Every placement of a SERIAL PRINT function block will use available RAM For most ladder diagram projects there is an more than enough RAM however ladder diagram projects with heavy memory usage functions could run short on RAM For more detail on all EZ LADDER Toolkit Function Blocks and objects refer to Chapter 22 Function Reference Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 08 CHAPTER 12 41939 Networking This chapter provides basic information to understand how to install configure and use the 41939 Communications in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents 31939 COMMUNMICAUONSG e 90 Configuring J1939 90 Receiving J1939 Network 92 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 12 41939 Networking J1939 Communications J1939 is a network protocol using CAN Controller Area Network communications This protocol is com monly found in many devices including engines and generators Across this network these devices trans mit or broadcast
141. a in the buffer when the function block is enabled to transmit again See Chapter 11 Serial Printing Input Output Connections The SERIAL PRINT function block placement requires connections of at least one input pin EN and two output pins Q ER Additional inputs are based on variables in serial text Res Boolean Timer Active State OterDetais p ox Output LX OX E vesemitis completed X EE Example Circuit CRZ HIAL PRIN Text Message Formatting The SERIAL PRINT function text formatted per ANSI C The function block examples shown are for VT100 terminals Variables as well as text may be printed These variables must be formatted correctly As variables are added to the text the function block will automatically add the appropriate input for the vari ables Text Text is entered exactly as the message is intended Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 281 Chapter 22 Function Reference Variables Variables are placed in the text using flags and print for adding variables to the text width precision specification fields The following is the configuration Example Text OIL PSI 3d identifies the beginning of a variable or other type of text entry flag This flag is optional Use the following flags to change the way data is tra
142. a matrix table of steps rows of table and the channels columns of table For each channel a boolean variable to be used as a contact is automatically created A DRUM SEQ always starts in step 1 Each false to true transition on the ST input will cause the step to increment to the next The DRUM SEQ will wrap to step 1 after the last step A true on RST will reset the SEQ to step 1 RST is domi nant and will not allow the SEQ to step when true Each step stores a unique setting for each channel This setting can be set as on or off true false As a contact is created to represent each channel when a DRUM SEQ chang es steps each channel is automatically set to the state the channel in that step Input Output Connections The DRUM SEQ function block placement requires connections of two input pins RST ST and one output pin Q In addition a boolean variable to be used as a contact is created for each channel A maximum of 32 channels is permitted per DRUM SEQ The matrix table is completed when the function is placed Type Integer Rea Boolean Timer Active State Other Datas Configuring the number of channels setting channel states and adding steps is handled using the DRUM Sequencer Properties dialog box This box is displayed when placing a DRUM SEQ function block Use the buttons provided to add insert delete and edit ste
143. able CHI INTEGER Figure 21 6 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 208 CHAPTER 22 Function Reference This chapter provides detailed information for each function block and object found in the EZ LADDER Toolkit For each function block and object the following is provided type inputs outputs and other special instructions needed to use them Chapter Contents Object and Function Block Basics 211 dll ese 212 213 AND ec ice ne te ee 214 ilc 215 BA PACI Merc M S 216 BIE UNPACH FE 217 BOOLEAN 218 OMP er 219 220 CNIR EST360R 221 224 sagi 225 8 1 1 226 228 DIRECT CONTACT ossia ea 229 230 T 231 EQUAL 233 dz ie Ml i m A 234 EEPRO
144. able input goes high The text will appear normally but the variable will not appear to update or change as the ladder diagram is executing To overcome the rising edge issue when displaying variable create TON timer circuit as shown in Q Figure 9 10 and use the timer contact to act as a refresh for the ENable input on the LCD_PRINT function block The refresh timer should be adjusted to your display preferences in Figure 9 10 CR1 will toggle on and off based on the Timer function TON giving the result of the LCD_PRINT seeing a rising edge at that timing rate CHI TON CRI LCD PRINTI Figure 9 9 For more detail on all EZ LADDER Toolkit Function Blocks and objects refer to Chapter 22 Function Reference Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 78 CHAPTER 10 Keypad Support This chapter provides basic information to understand how to install configure and use the Keypad feature in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents Keypad Functionally 80 Configuring the Keypad in the Project Settings 80 Getting Data from the n 82 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 10 Keypad Support Keypad Functionality EZ LADDER Toolkit provides the ability for the additio
145. actual A is less than fall F the output FQ is true and RQ is false The enable EN must be true for the HYSTER func tion to be enabled FQ Input Output Connections The HYSTER function block placement requires connections of four input pins EN A R F and two output pins RQ FQ H worm integer Rest Boolean Timer Active State Other Deis en wma X wme OA me x OR x LE ome 50 X Do p Re owe X gd Fe owe J qq X Jf f 5 go 0 0 Example Circuit CHI HYSTERI Related Functions LIMIT Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 244 Chapter 22 Function Reference INTEGER INTEGER Description dis The INTEGER function converts the input P into an integer output O The enable EN must be true for the INTEGER function to be enabled The Q output is true when the IN TEGER function is enabled In addition to converting a Boolean Timer or Real to an integer the INTEGER function block can be used to copy one integer to another Input Output Connections The INTEGER function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN P and two output pins Q O worm Type Integer Real Seca Timer Active State Other Dorais E ma TT X o o ce ow X X X X e f xy ee S S owt jJ xx po Example Circuit CHI INTEG
146. al world input Its normal state is false or normally de energized An internal DIRECT CONTACT may also be referred to as a control relay CR A true condition on the input if internal coil is true for internal contacts or real world input is true then the contact will allow power flow and devices located to the right of the DI RECT CONTACT may operate Example Circuit CHI COIL Related Functions DIRECT COIL INVERTED COIL INVERTED CONTACT Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 229 Chapter 22 Function Reference DIV DIV Description The DIV function divides the P1 input by the P2 input and outputs the result O The en able EN must be true for the DIV function to be enabled The Q output is true when the DIV function is enabled The result O is the whole number quotient only No remainder is provided P Input Output Connections The DIV function block placement requires connections of three input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O worm type Integer Rea Boolean Timer Active Stato Other Details mu X eme om ma X X Lm pom X X E LLL ow X LLL ow X X loce Example Circuit Related Functions ADD SUB MULT Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 230 Chapter 22 Function Reference DRUM SEQ DRUM SEQ Description Q The DRUM SEQ function is comprised of
147. ame as for a single SSI Encoder input The only difference is one target s GC SSI function block s must be configured as Master while the other targets GC 551 function block s must be configured as Slave As previously discussed the Master and Slave is set in Gray Code SSI Prop erties dialog box An encoder connected to a single target must be used as a Master An encoder connected to two targets must be used as a Master and Slave respectively Incorrect setup will cause the SSI feature to malfunction Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 141 CHAPTER 17 EZ LADDER Toolkit Reports This chapter provides basic information to understand how to create and use EZ LADDER Toolkit project reports Chapter Contents EZ LADDER Toolkit eene rennen 143 Variable Definitions Report e nennen 143 Cross References Report 144 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 17 EZ LADDER Toolkit Reports EZ LADDER Toolkit Reports EZ LADDER Toolkit includes reporting features to aid in creation troubleshooting and documenting ladder diagram projects Each report when generated is viewable and printable There are two basic reports that can be gener
148. and coils are updated and will override variable changes Actual real world inputs cannot be changed at all wish to be kept must be manually changed in the project in the Edit Mode Additionally any variable Q Changing any variable value in real time does not change the ladder diagram project Changes that changes on the target are lost if the target is stopped started or power is reset to it Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 63 CHAPTER 7 Retentive Variables amp EEPROM Storage This chapter provides basic information to understand what Retentive variables are when to use and how to use them including their limitations Chapter Contents What is a Retentive eee eene 65 How to Make a Variable Retentive seus 65 Retentive Variable Limitations 66 EEPROM Memory 66 Installing EEPROM Memory nnne nnn nnn 66 Using EEPROM Memory nnne nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn 67 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 7 Retentive Variables What is a Retentive Variable A Retentive variable is a variable that s value is automatically stored in non volatile memory in the event of a
149. angedimit Reset CNTR Modulo n Load OTR LFLAG DFLAG Flag on IDX Flag on CMP Flag on BW Flag on CY Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 221 Chapter 22 Function Reference Quadrature Mode Non quadrature Counter input B sets the direction of counting increase or decrease and a pulse on input A causes the counter to count by 1 X1 quadrature Counter operates in X1 quadrature mode X2 quadrature X Counter operates in X2 quadrature mode X4 quadrature Counter operates in X4 quadrature mode Count Mode Free Running Free running mode Counter will wrap in either direction if maximum or minimum value is reached Single cycle Counter will count until maximum value is reached and then stop counting Used with CY Flag Counter must be reset to continue counting Range limit Counter will only count between zero and the value loaded in the register Modulo n Actual count will equal number of pulses divided by value of the register 1 Index Mode Disable Index Index input is disabled and will not cause any action on the actual count register Load CNTR When the index input is active the actual count register is loaded with the value of the DTR register The DTR register is loaded using PD and LD on the function block Reset CNTR When the Index input is active the actual count register is reset to zero Load OTR When the index input
150. ardware Targets HEC 420X E R Features OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage 0 20mA Analog Inputs x 4 16 bit 4 PWM Capable Outputs x 4 Output Current Feedback PWM Modbus Slave Hardware Counters 2 Channels J1939 Communications Serial Printing Retentive Variables Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM_ SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Optional Multipurpose Serial Port Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Shift Left S
151. are Counter Real Time Clock J1939 Communications Retentive Variables EBB I O Expansion Port OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage Modbus Slave Serial Printing Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Limit LIMIT Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF
152. ariable attributes later in this chapter You have now placed a linkable variable If the variable you need to insert already exists select it from the list and click to insert it Variables names must always begin with a letter and cannot contain spaces Trying to begin variables with numbers or using spaces will result in a error message being displayed Variables may be created at any time without inserting or placing them in the ladder diagram Q workspace To create a variable without placing it from the tool bar select the Edit Variables button Edit Vars The Variables window will open as shown previously Use the App button to create variables as needed When function blocks are used with variables as previously covered only supported variable types Q are allowed Typically most function blocks will lock the types of variables linked to it s outputs as the same type linked to it s inputs When changing variable types that are an input or an output to a function block delete the variables and function block Then insert the function block and new variables to remove all the variable type associations that previously existed Variable Types There are four variable types supported in the EZ LADDER Toolkit They are Boolean BOOL REAL INTEGER and TIMER Each type of variable exists for specific purposes and each has pros and cons de pending upon the ladder diagram project needs Examples of Variables Boolean or 1
153. at are organized to promote a step by step progression of using the EZ LADDER Toolkit from installation to troubleshooting Each chapter contains specific information that is relevant to understanding how to use the EZ LADDER Toolkit Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual T Chapter 1 Getting Started Installing the EZ LADDER Toolkit To install EZ LADDER Toolkit on your computer follow the following steps Once EZ LADDER Toolkit is installed it must be activated before it may be used with actual hardware targets Windows Administrator Rights are required for proper installation The EZ LADDER directory security is dependent on local network security settings and may be set for user Read Execute only To allow the user to be able to write to this directory an Administrator must change the permissions accordingly EZ LADDER Toolkit without Administrator Permissions will cause EZ LADDER Toolkit not install and not operate correctly Q Windows Administrator Rights are required to install register activate EZ LADDER Installing 1 Copy the Serial Number printed on the face of the EZ LADDER Toolkit CD to a piece of paper You will need this serial number during installation 2 Insert the EZ LADDER Toolkit CD into your CD drive If you have Active Content Enabled for your CD Drive a Menu will appear Click the INSTALL EZ LADDER STANDARD EDITION VX X X X to run the EZ LADDER Toolkit setup
154. ated Variable Definitions and Cross References Variable Definitions Report The variable definitions report provides a summary of all of the variables in the ladder diagram project These variables are sorted by type for easy reference For each variable the report shows Name Type I O Number Default Value and its Description To generate and view this report using the Reports Menu select Variable Definitions A report window will open displaying the generated report See Figure 17 1 Print Page and View Controls uL Print Preview amp J Variable Definitions Change Page to View Control 3 10 2000 5 45 Target Diveftiss Corporation BLC ON A CHIB Version 0 0 0 0 Beid Humber 0 BOOLEAN Mom Variable Report Figure 17 1 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 143 Chapter 17 EZ LADDER Toolkit Reports Cross References Report The Cross Reference Report provides a summary of the objects that are in the ladder diagram project The project objects are sorted by the type of object The actual types of objects and data to view is selected prior to generating the Cross Reference Report To generate and view this report using the Reports Menu select Cross References The Cross Reference Report dialog box will open with the choices to what objects to include in the report See Figure 17 2 Figure 17 2 Using the check boxes provided select or de se
155. being available in the EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project while others automatically configure the analog inputs in the EZ LADDER Toolkit when the target is selected Q Generally off the shelf controllers that have analog inputs will automatically install in the EZ LADDER Toolkit and their variables are created automatically for the analog inputs Q PLC on a Chip targets and others typically require the analog inputs be installed in the Project Settings before they can be used in an ladder diagram project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 153 Chapter 19 Analog Inputs Installing Analog Inputs for PLC on a Chip Targets Some hardware targets require analog inputs to be installed and prior to being available in the EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project while others automatically configure the analog inputs in the EZ LADDER Toolkit when the target is selected As the PLC on a Chip is the most commonly used target that required Analog input installation it will be used as an example to install and install the analog input support The analog inputs are configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the PRoPERTIES button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click
156. biss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 17 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit Settings The Settings menu item opens the Project Settings Dialog This dialog is used to configure the actual hardware target controller and its features The target is selected from the available list Depending upon the target selected additional configuration settings may be required and additional features can be configured from this menu Refer to Chapter 4 Configuring Targets for detailed information regarding target configurations Bootloader The Bootloader menu item will open the Bootloader dialog window This window is used to install or update hardware target kernels The Bootloader menu item is only available in the Run Mode OptiCAN The OptiCAN menu item will open the OptiCAN Configuration Tool This tool is used to configure the OptiCAN network The OptiCAN menu item is only available in the Run Mode and when OptiCAN is enabled REPORTS MENU The REPORTS Menu is used to generate view and print reports that may be helpful when developing a lad der diagram project Variable Definitions The Variables Definitions report generates a list of all variables present in the ladder diagram project and their specific information including name I O Number Default Value and their description Cross References The Cross Reference opens the Cross Reference Dialog box This box is where the criteria for the report is selected
157. by using the EEPROM WRITE and EEPROM READ function blocks The EEPROM WRITE and EEPROM READ function blocks use variables to set the EEPROM address To write and read values from the EEPROM you must understand that the EEPROM memory is basically a bank of memory and the variable values may be stored into this bank The EEPROM bank is organized by per byte and each variable type has a specific number of bytes that it will require Boolean variables fill two bytes while all other variable types fill four bytes of EEPROM The address provides the location where to store the variable or from where to read the data into a vari able from The actual address is the first byte location of the EEPROM memory Each EEPROM address is absolute and is one byte in size To correctly store and read variables of the same or different type they must be mapped based on the starting byte location address and the number of bytes to store or read for the variable type When writing a boolean to address 0 the actual variable will use addresses 0 and 1 two bytes Should you write an integer variable into address 0 then it would use addresses 0 3 A memory map should be created and used to assign variable types and addresses prior to coding to ensure that variable size and types are accounted for You must use the same address for writing and reading a variable for correct operation If the addresses are not the same and or you have overwritten some bytes of whe
158. c di i CTU CTD CTUD TOF Insert Function DIY CR2 3 x 1 e Contacts Functions Variables CR2 DIV Labels _ Bad Link p Good VarOut Connected Links y Starting verify LINK ERROR Vertical link not found at 5 2 1 Errors found Figure 5 8 connected to the second function blocks variable input you must insert a variable between them Failure to place a variable between function blocks variable inputs and outputs only will result in the ladder diagram project Compiling successfully but it will not operate as intended 0 When connecting two function blocks in series where variable output of the first needs to be Using Copy and Paste EZ LADDER Toolkit being a Windows based application allows the copy and paste functions inherit to Windows with certain limitations imposed It is possible to copy any single or combination of objects function blocks variables and links to the Windows Clipboard To Copy object s choose the Select Tool from the tool bar To choose a single object left click on the object to select it To select multiple objects click and drag across the objects Objects may be selected by hold ing crRL key while clicking on them With the items selected using the Edit Menu choose Copy right click and choose Copy The objects are now copies to the Windows Clipboard Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER To
159. censee to use the Licensed Software as defined below provided herewith Installing using or attempting to install or use such Licensed Software or otherwise expressing assent to the terms herein constitutes acceptance of this Agreement Any installation use or attempted installation or use of such Licensed Software by any party other than a Licensee or otherwise in violation of this Agreement is expressly prohibited Introduction Whereas Divelbiss has developed certain modules of computer software known as PLC ON A CHIP Kernel and EZ LADDER Toolkit and Licensee wishes to secure certain rights to use such software and Divelbiss is prepared to license such rights subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement therefore in consideration of the mutual covenants contained herein and intending to be legally bound hereby Divelbiss and Licensee agree as follows 1 Licensed Software The PLC ON A CHIP Kernel and EZ LADDER Toolkit software whether in source code or object code format and all related docu mentation and revisions updates and modifications thereto collectively Licensed Software is licensed by Divelbiss to Licensee strictly subject to the terms of this Agreement 2 License Grant Divelbiss hereby grants to Licensee a non exclusive non transferable license to use the Licensed Software as follows a Except as otherwise provided herein one 1 user may install and use on one 1 desktop personal computer and o
160. ch controller on the OptiCAN Network may have different settings and all will be required to have a different Node ID address OptiCAN Controller Heartbeat Each OptiCAN controller has the ability to broadcast a signal called a heartbeat This signal is broadcast at a regular interval and is used to ensure that all devices on the network are communicating properly Each node automatically listens for this heartbeat and adjusts OptiCAN registers based on the network condition These conditions may be monitored using function blocks One node on the OptiCAN network MUST broadcast the heartbeat message for the network to function properly Although it is possible to have multiple controllers on one network sending heartbeats it is recommended only one controller broadcast a heartbeat per network In the event the heartbeat is lost then the local ladder diagram project should ignore data from the Q network as the loss of heartbeat signifies that communication with part or all of the network has been lost How a controller responds to a network loss is entirely dependent on the ladder diagram project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 103 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking Configuring a Controller on the OptiCAN Network Before a controller may communicate on the OptiCAN network it must be configured in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Once the OptiCAN settings are configured they are stored in the actual ladder diagram project
161. cond P In addition to converting an Integer or Real to a Timer the Timer function block can be used to copy one timer to another Input Output Connections The TIMER function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN P and two output pins Q Q worm Type Integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Other Dorais E ma TT X o o ce ow X X e S sam Mc EN owe jJ X Example Circuit Related Functions INTEGER REAL BOOLEAN Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 292 Chapter 22 Function Reference TOF TOF Description IN The TOF off delay timer time delay on drop out is a programmable timer with a variable turn off time When the input IN input is true the output Q is true When the input IN sees a transition from true to false the timer begins timing When the elapsed time ET is equal to the preset time PT the output Q de energizes goes false When the input PT ET IN sees a false to true to false transition the timer is reset and begins timing again Input Output Connections The TOF function block placement requires connections of two input pins IN PT and two output pins Q ET Type Integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Dotais m x reme mt x ET
162. cooperate fully with in connection with such audit making all facilities records and personnel available upon request by Divelbiss or its representative 5 Divelbiss Warranties a b Divelbiss represents and warrants that i it is the owner of the Licensed Software and ii this Agreement violates no previous agreement between Divelbiss and any third party Divelbiss further warrants that for a period of 90 days from the date this Agreement is accepted by Licensee the EZ LADDER Toolkit will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying documentation provided by Divelbiss provided that the EZ LADDER Toolkit i has not been modified ii has been maintained according to all applicable maintenance recommendations iii has not been used with hardware or software or installed or operated in a manner inconsistent with any manuals or relevant system requirements provided by Divelbiss and iv has not been subjected to abuse negligence or other improper treatment including without limitation use outside the operating environment or range of applications prescribed in any manuals or relevant system requirements provided by Divelbiss by Divelbiss Provided that Licensee gives prompt written notice to Divelbiss of any alleged breach of the foregoing warranty and that such alleged breach can be reproduced by Divelbiss Divelbiss will use commercially reasonable efforts to repair or replace the EZ LADDER Toolkit so that it performs
163. ct s state and is always opposite of the Direct Coil Power Rails and Links Power Rails As previously discussed an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram contains objects contacts coils and func tion blocks For the ladder diagram to operate correctly each rung must be complete on each side by con necting it to the left power rail and the right power rail This is required because all objects in a rung must have a power source the left power rail to provide power to the objects and a common return right power rail to complete the circuit Power rails run the entire length of an EZ LADDER Toolkit project Figure 3 3 shows a typical ladder dia gram rung and identifies the power rails Please note the rung is connected to both the right and left power rails PBI Sw M1 _ Left Power Rail Right Power Rail Quot Figure 3 3 Links As discussed previously a rung must be complete and connected to both power rails for proper operation Links Horizontal and Vertical are used to connect objects and function blocks to other objects and function blocks as well as to power rails Horizontal Links connect devices horizontally or on the same rung Vertical Links connect devices on different rungs Consider each link like an electrical wire that is needed to connect devices in a circuit Figure 3 4 identifies the types of links Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 27 Chapter 3 Ladder Diagram Basics CRI CR3
164. cted and it will compile but it will not function on the target Example Circuit CHI CHR Related Functions LIMIT HYSTER Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 219 Chapter 22 Function Reference CNTRTMR CNTRTMR Description EN Q The CNTRTMR function provides access and functionality to high speed counters on targets When placing the function it s trigger can be set to rising falling or any edge of the pulse input of the counter The enable EN must be true for the CNTRTMR function to be enabled a R resets the current counter value CV Q is true when the function is enabled The Input Channel must be selected when placing the CNTRTMR function Only available channels will be listed Input Output Connections The CNTRTMR function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN R and two output pins Q CV Pin Type Active State Other Details Rise Fall Any Actual hardware not part of block NENNEN LX LX S Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 220 Chapter 22 Function Reference 157366 CNTR LS7366R Description The 157366 function block is used to read and write to the LS7366R counter inte grated circuit The LS7366R is an integrated circuit that operates as a high speed counter that supports counting up down and also quadrature In addition to this
165. ction Reference MAVG MAVG Description The MAVG function calculates the moving average of the P input The number of samples is specified when the object is placed The output O is the calculated moving average value of the P input The enable EN must be true for the MAVG function to be enabled When EN is true the output is the moving average When EN is false the output is equal to the P input The larger the number of samples the more RAM is used and the slower the reaction time of the block output to input changes Size the number of samples to give the best suited reaction time and to use the least amount of RAM needed accomplish to meet the operation specifications Input Output Connections The MAVG function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN P and two output pins Q om X tee om X X LLL of owe X X owe Example Circuit Related Functions AVG Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 260 Chapter 22 Function Reference MAX MAX Description EN Q The MAX function compares all the Px input values and outputs the largest of them on the O Output The number of inputs is specified when the object is placed The enable EN must be true for the MAX function to be enabled P1 Input Output Connections The MAX function block placement requires connections of at least 3 input pins
166. ctions UNLATCH DIRECT COIL INVERTED COIL Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 253 Chapter 22 Function Reference LCD CLEAR LCD CLEAR Description E S The LCD CLR function block is used to clear the LCD display When the EN input detects a rising edge the LCD Display is set to be cleared The LCD display is cleared and up dated at the END of the ladder scan Input Output Connections The LCD CLR function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and one output pin Q Torin Type Integer Real Boolean Timer ActiveState Other Dotais om mu x mm om lt Example Circuit CHI CD CLEAHIT Related Functions LCD PRINT Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 254 Chapter 22 Function Reference LCD PRINT LCD PRINT Description The LCD PRINT function is used for printing data to the LCD Display When then EN input senses a rising edge the block prepares the text that was provided when the LCD PRINT function was placed and marks it to update at the end of the current ladder scan The Q output is set true when the print is completed The ER output is set 1 ER to non zero if the printed data is larger than the LCD will display At the end of the ladder scan the display is updated See Chapter 9 LCD Display Support Input Output Connections The LCD PRINT function block placement requi
167. d Cable Specifications Symbol Minimum Nominal Maximum Unit Comments z v 9 o 2 1200 ohm resistor load is required at each end of the network Please adhere to the following specifications for terminating resistor requirements for all OptiCAN networks Terminating Resistor Specifications Symbol Minimum Nominal Maximum Unit Comments mace 1 Assumes a short of 16V to Voay y 3 The cable shield should be grounded near the middle of the network cable run The shield should only be connected to ground and one point on the network Multiple ground points could cause a ground loop decrease noise immunity and adversely affect network performance 4 If wiring as a network bus with stub connections the maximum stub length from bus to node is 1 Meter oee Figure 14 1 for a sample connection diagram Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 101 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking TWISTED PAIR SHIELDED CABLE TWISTED PAIR SHIELDED CABLE Figure 14 1 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual SHIELD SHOULD BE GROUNDED AT CABLE MIDPOINT OptiCAN Device2 OptiCAN Device 1 OptiCAN Device 3 MAXIMUM LENGTH DEPENDENT ON BUS LOADING amp CABLE 120 OHM RESISTOR MUST BE INSTALLED OptiCAN Device 4 E 120 OHM 120 OHM RESISTOR RESISTOR O O EGND EGND O
168. d function blocks described in this chapter are organized in alphabetical order Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 211 Chapter 22 Function Reference ABS ABS Description EN Q The ABS function provides an absolute value output O from the input value P1 The en able EN must be true for the ABS function block to be enabled The Q output is true when the ABS function is enabled Input Output Connections The ABS function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN P1 and two output pins Q O worm type integer Rest Boolean Timer ActiveState Other Deras Em ma X wme om me X x ont j X ow Example Circuit CRI ABS EN Q Number Pl AbsNum Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 212 Chapter 22 Function Reference ADD ADD Description EN Q The ADD functions sums all the inputs Px together and outputs this number O The num ber of inputs is specified when the function is placed in the program The enable EN must be true for the ADD function to be enabled The Q output is true when the ADD function is bled enable Pi 0 Input Output Connections The ADD function block placement requires connections of at least three input pins EN P1 P P2 and two output pins Q O The number of inputs is specified when the function is in serted The EN
169. dPropertiesForm Name Name of the PID function Name PID Description Enter a description Sample Period Secs The sample period in seconds Min 01S 86 4005 sample period resolution 50pS Sample Period secs 1 1 Minimum Output Value Minimum PID Output value Min Output Value 15 allowed Output 1000 Maximum Output Value Maximum PID Output value allowed If SP PV or process error is determined not to be infinite values the error flag is set and the CO is set to the IO value When these values are valid infinite again the PID function will return to normal Input Output Connections The PID function block placement requires connections of 7 input pins EN SP PV KP KI KD IO and 3 output pins Q CO ER _ Integral Gain Initial Value PID is init to this value Control Output Calculated Signal Error Amount of error from set point EE NENNEN S S __ S S __ S S Lo _ 000 S __ S __ S S Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 211 Chapter 22 Function Reference Example Circuit CHI PID1 CO jes CntrlVal ER s etptErr Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 212 Chapter 22 Function Reference PWM PWM Description The PWM function controls the function of a hardware PWM output channel this EN Q channel is specifi
170. day with the use of PLCs the same functionality is achieved by drawing the circuit functionality in software similar to the original relay logic panel wiring diagrams were drawn Ladder Diagram is a graphical representation of boolean equations using contacts inputs and coils out puts The ladder diagram language allows these features to be viewed in a graphical form by placing graph ic symbols into the program workspace similar to a Relay Logic electrical diagram Both ladder diagram and relay logic diagrams are connected on the left and right sides to power rails A comparison of a hard wired relay logic system and a programmable system using EZ LADDER Toolkit as the programming platform will show the similarities which make the programming using EZ LADDER Toolkit quick and easy to apply to any application Figure 3 1 shows a block diagram on the left and the hard wired relay logic control system on the right For easy comparison it is divided into three sections Input Devices Includes devices operated manually i e push buttons and devices operated automatically i e limit switches by the process or machine being controlled Relay Control Logic Consists of relays interconnected to energize or de energize output devices in re sponse to status of input devices and in accordance with the logic designed into the control circuit Output Devices Consists of motor starters solenoids etc which would control the machine or proce
171. dder diagram must have at least one Keypad Function Block installed and in use Any discrete keys will not operate unless one Keypad Function Block is installed in the ladder diagram project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 02 Chapter 10 Keypad Support In addition to reading complete values from the keypad it is possible to read individual keys to determine if they are pressed Each key has a predefined address that can be used as an input boolean type variable that is classified as an input Create a contact as a new variable and in the Var Number field enter the address of the specific key desired When the key is pressed the contact will be true The following addresses are used to read discrete keypad buttons Assignment KB 0 KB 1 KB 2 KB 3 KB 4 KB 5 KB 6 KB 7 KB 8 KB 9 Button Description Numeric O Numeric 1 Numeric 2 Numeric 3 Numeric 4 Numeric 5 Numeric 6 Numeric 7 Numeric 8 Numeric 9 Function Reference Assignment KB CLEAR KB DP KB KB F1 KB F2 KB F3 KB F4 KB UP KB DOWN KB ENTER Button Description Clear Button Decimal Point Button Button F1 Button F2 Button Button F4 Button Up Button Down Button Enter Button Q For more detail on all EZ LADDER Toolkit Function Blocks and objects refer to Chapter 22 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 83 CHAPTER 11 Serial Printing Sup
172. der dia gram project Figure 9 6 is a sample of a complete LCD PRINT circuit CHR LCD PHRINTI Figure 9 6 Writing Variables to the Display In addition to printing static text it is often desirable to be able to print variables to the display This is helpful in displaying process parameters and menu items To write a variable to the LCD display the same _ PRINT function block is still used As in the simple text printing the text is entered into the Text field In ad dition to the text control characters may be inserted that represent variables and how to format the variable text For a full listing of what control characters and formatting is supported please see the LCD PRINT function block in Chapter 22 Function Reference Figure 9 7 illustrates a sample text dialog with control characters ub Lcd Print Properties Description Text Fil PSI Figure 9 7 When an LCD PRINT function is inserted to display variables a new variable input is added to the function block automatically for each variable that will be displayed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 9 LCD Display Support Figure 9 8 represents a sample ladder diagram project using a LCD PRINT function block with a variable input that will be displayed LCD Figure 9 8 The LCD PRINT function block is rising edge sensitive Therefore it will only display one time as 0 the EN
173. dge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 195 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PCS 2X1 PCS 2X2 Features Real Time Clock Retentive Variables EEPROM Storage HDIO Expansion Bus Optional Multipurpose Serial Port Modbus Slave Serial Printing Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WARITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Grey Scale Encoder GC SSI Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_ TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching
174. dify Input Register numbers range from MB 30001 through MB 40000 Holding Registers Holding registers are registers that may be read and modified by both the Master and Slave These are the most commonly used registers to pass data between the master and slave Holding Register numbers range from MB 40001 through MB 50000 Q All Modbus registers are accessed as variables and must begin with MB_ to identify a modbus slave register Assigning and Setting Slave Registers To use Modbus Slave registers registers must be assigned to variables For more information regarding variables refer to Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Modbus registers can be assigned by editing an existing variable when new variables are created Coils and Discrete Input registers are to be used with Boolean variable types while Holding and Input Registers are typically used with Integer variables To assign a Modbus register to a variable using the Add Variable or Edit Variable dialog click the button next to the Address Register field See Figure 13 2 Add Variable Name OiPS Description r Variable Type Input Output Internal Retentive Figure 13 2 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 96 Chapter 13 Modbus Networking The Edit Address Register dialog box will open See Figure 13 3 Using the drop down menu select MB Modbus From the now visible
175. dware Targets Configuring for Modbus Slave As with most features Modbus Slave must be installed and configured in the EZ LADDER Toolkit before it may be used Divelbiss standard controllers based on PLC on a Chip Enhanced Baby Bear PCS XXX etc are configured based on the part number For details on specific targets please see Chapter 20 Hard ware Targets To configure a device on a Modbus network you must have details and understanding of the ID s Communication Mode and Type Parity Number of Data Bits and the Baud Rate Modbus Slave is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the button You do not need to add any devices for Modbus Slave functionality In the Project Settings window click the wopBus button The Modbus Setup dialog box will open See Figure 13 1 Click the Enable check box to enable Modbus Slave Complete the setup that is required to add this device to the modbus network Click ox to save the Modbus Setup and close the dialog box Modbus is now con figured for operation and can be utilized from the ladder diagram project Each device on a Modbus network must have a unique ID number Duplicate ID numbers will result in a malfunctioning network and communication errors Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual
176. e cycle X2 The A and B inputs are used in X2 mode for use with biphase encoders The count value changes 2 times X1 mode given the same input signal X4 TheA and B inputs are used in X4 mode for use with biphase encoders The count value changes with each input transition 4 times faster than X1 given the same input signal Free Running When counting pulses the counter will continue to count in either direction and wrap if the count goes larger or smaller than the standard integer 32 bit Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 134 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support Single Cycle Index Mode When counting pulses the counter will stop counting in either direction if the count goes larger or smaller than the standard integer 32 bit A Reset or Load is required to restart counting Range Limit Counting range is limited between zero 0 and the PD DTR input on the CNTR LS7366R function block The LD function block input must be used to load the DTR one scan cycle Modulo N The counter value will be equal to the value of the input signal divided by the value loaded in DTR plus 1 DTR 1 If DTR is 1 then the count will equal the input signal divided by 2 or will count at 1 2 the rate of the input signal Disable Index The device s Index input will have no affect on operation Load CNTR Configures the device s Index input to act as a oad counter This will load the value
177. e Counter EEPROM Storage EBB I O Expansion Port Retentive Variables Real Time Clock Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME Hardware Counter CNTRTMR High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 174 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets ICM EBB 500 Features Hardware
178. e any material breach of this Agreement within thirty 30 days after receiving notice of such breach ii Licensee becomes insolvent or unable to pay its debts makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors ceases to be a going concern files for protection of the bankruptcy laws becomes the subject of any involuntary proceeding under federal bankruptcy laws or has a receiver or trustee appointed to manage its assets iii Licensee consolidates or merges into or with any other entity or entities or sells or transfers all or substantially all of its assets or iv Following ninety 90 days written notice of termination to Licensee Licensee may terminate this Agreement and all licenses hereunder in the event that Divelbiss fails to cure any material breach of this Agreement within thirty 30 days after receiving notice of such breach Any fees or expenses payable by Licensee to Divelbiss shall not be reduced or otherwise affected by termination of this Agreement In the event of termination of this Agreement for any reason neither party shall be liable to the other on account of loss of prospective profits or anticipated sales or on account of expenditures inventories investments or commitments Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason Licensee will immediately return to Divelbiss or upon instruction from Divelbiss destroy all copies of the Licensed Software including all code documentation manuals etc and all Conf
179. e connected target Common Ladder Diagram Errors When creating ladder diagram projects using EZ LADDER Toolkit here are some of the common errors made during the creating process Connecting Functions to Functions Errors When connecting Variable outputs of one function to a variable input of another function a variable must be placed between the two functions Figure 18 1 illustrates the incorrect way of connecting functions to func tions variable inputs and outputs Figure 18 2 illustrates the same ladder diagram project but with the corrections made a variable between the function blocks 0 If a function s variable output is connected directly to another functions variable input the program will compile successfully however the program will not function as designed A variable must be placed between the output and the input for proper operation Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 150 Chapter 18 EZ Ladder Standard vartest 414 EZ File Edit view Project Reports Window Help Troubleshooting 8 m m E Label d d ik C T Lu s 4 TOF Insert Function MAVG Coils Contacts Functions Variables Labels Figure 18 1 EZ Ladder Standard vartest 414 EZ Fie Edit view Project Reports Window Help O Cannot connect directly T ELNE Bae Label eae i C
180. e down counter triggers on a false to true transition on the CU input R Input Output Connections The CTU function block placement requires connections of three input pins CU R PV and two output pins Q CV worm type Integer Rea Boolean Timer Active Stato Other Detais mu x Ree OR oma LLL oma X Example Circuit Timing Diagram CU A CV Related Functions CTD CTUD Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 229 Chapter 22 Function Reference CTUD CTUD Description The CTUD function is programmable software up and down counter This counter is a com bination of the CTU and CTD therefore it can count up and down based on the count inputs as well as the Reset and Load inputs With reset R not active a true on input CU will increment the current CV count by one while a true on input CD will cause the current count CV to decrement by one When the CV PV the output QU will be true When the CV 0 the output QD will be true A true on the reset R will cause CV 0 QU to go false and QD to go true A true on the load LD will cause CV PV QU to go true and QD to go false The reset is dominant and takes priority over all inputs The counter inputs trigger on a false to true transition on CU or CD Input Output Connections The CTUD functi
181. e of the Direct Contact Coils Coils represent two types of devices The first is real world digital output devices such as solenoids valves and motors The second is that coils may represent internal relays also named control relays CRs When acting as a real world output the ladder diagram object will control the current state of the real world output it is assigned When used as an internal control relay the coil will control the current state of the control relay s coil Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 26 Chapter 3 Ladder Diagram Basics Direct Coil A Also known as a normally open coil the direct coil may represent real world outputs or internal relay coils As a real world output when the coil is energized TRUE it will be cause the real world output to be TRUE energized As a real world output when the coil is de energized FALSE it will cause the real world out put to be FALSE de energized When used as an internal relay it controls it s contact s state Negated Coil Also known as a normally closed coil the negated coil may represent real world outputs or internal relay coils As a real world output when the coil is energized TRUE it will cause the real world output to be FALSE de energized As a real world output when the coil is de energized FALSE it will be cause the real world output to be TRUE energized When used as an internal relay it controls it s conta
182. ect Settings Menu PLCMOD M2 12800X All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Using certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels HDIO Bus Hardware Counter Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Retentive Variables Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ
183. ed additional variables will be required to read to the bits of the origi nal bit addressable variable one for each bit that you intend to use These additional variables will be boolean input variables representing a boolean or 1 for the actual bit In Figure 5 11 the Add Variable dialog box shows the creation of one of the actual bit reading boolean variables These bit reading variables are always set as Input and the Var I O Number is the variable name of the bit addressable variable and the bit number to read separated by a period In Figure 5 11 the bit addressable variable is named Limit and the bit shown being read is 3 or the placeholder for the number 8 in integer form and the variable that is reading and storing the bit is named RBit3 Therefore RBit3 will be equal to the actual binary status or 1 of bit 3 of the Limit variable Bit Reading Input Variable Boolean Name ad Add Variable Name RBt3 st Description This will be equal to Bt 3 of the variable Limit 8 s position Variable Type Input Var I O Number Default Value 7 Name of the Bit Addressable variable and bit number to be read Format is Output Internal Name BitNumber Retentive Variable Type Input Figure 5 11 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 54 CHAPTER 6 Downloading and Running Projects This chapter provides basic information n
184. ed when the function is placed When the EN is true the hard ware PWM channel outputs a square wave with the specified duty cycle DC at the frequency pre programmed this frequency is determined by the PWM channel and is configured when the PWM channel is installed in the target settings menu DC unless the PWM_FREQ function overrides this frequency with its own The Q output is true when the function is enabled When the PWM function is placed you must specify the actual hardware PWM channel that the function will control and the Polarity Starting Low will cause the PWM channel to start with a TTL low Starting High will cause the PWM channel to start with a TTL high Refer to Chapter 8 Pulse Width Modulation for details on PWM functionality Input Output Connections The PWM function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN DC and one output pin Q worm type integer Real Boolean Timer ActiveState orner Details ma _ X o ma X X LLL ef owe x Example Circuit CHI PYM DutyCycles 9 DC Related Functions PWM FREQ Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 273 Chapter 22 Function Reference PWM FREQ PWM FREQ Description PWM FREQ function controls the frequency of a hardware PWM output channel EN Q this channel is specified when the function is placed When the EN sees a low to high transitio
185. ee payable for the first year with the license fee and thereafter annually at least thirty 30 days before the anniversary date of this Agreement Divelbiss will provide maintenance and support of the EZ LADDER Toolkit in the form of i such periodic corrections updates and revisions to the EZ LADDER Toolkit as Divelbiss in its sole discretion may from time to time elect to release and ii responses to inquiries submitted by Licensee by email to Divelbiss at sales divelbiss com The maintenance and support fee is specified in the applicable Divelbiss price list This agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties relating to the Licensed Software and the subject matter hereof supersedes all other proposals quotes understandings or agreements whether written or oral and cannot be modified except by a writing signed by both Licensee and Divelbiss In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Agreement and any purchase order or similar documentation prepared by Licensee in connection with the transactions contemplated herein this Agreement shall govern and take precedence notwithstanding Divelbiss s failure to object to any conflicting provisions Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein except for payment obligations under Sections 3 or 15 neither party shall be liable for any failure of performance beyond its reasonable control Except as otherwise provided this Agreement will be subject to and
186. eeded to connect to hardware targets download ladder diagram projects and use real time EZ LADDER Toolkit features Chapter Contents Switching Modes in EZ LADDER Toolkit 56 Monitor Mode 57 Connecting fo 2 cu Dau dul 58 Connecting for the First Time to a New Target 60 Downloading Ladder Diagram Projects to Targets 61 Features ccn 61 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 6 Downloading amp Running Projects Switching Modes in EZ LADDER Toolkit EZ LADDER Toolkit is generally has two modes of operation Up to this point most of the time we have been using the Edit Mode The Edit Mode is used to open and close projects configure targets create lad der diagram projects verify and compile them The Monitor Mode is used to connect to hardware targets download ladder diagram projects monitor their power flow in real time and to work with target utilities Typically switching modes is done often during ladder diagram project development Switching to Monitor Mode To switch to monitor mode on the tool bar click the Monitor button Refer to Chapter 2 Navigation EZ
187. either SPIO or SPI1 Figure 15 6 shows the Device Properties window r 25 Device Properties Figure 15 6 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 125 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support Click ADS7841 using the key click the SPI port and click ox The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties window will now list the ADS7841 and the SPI ports as installed devices Click the ADS7841 in the device list PRoPERTIES button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 15 7 ad PLC ON A CHIP x DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X Devices Device Name Descriptio 15 7 The SPI port must be installed individually or no SPI ports will show available in later drop down configuration menus Click the PRoPERTIES button The ADS7841 Properties dialog box will open Click the app button A new dia log will open where you can select the properties required to communicate with this specific device Multiple SPI devices may be placed on the same SPI port These devices can be of the same part or a combination of different types of supported SPI devices Each device must have a unique CS Chip Select assigned to control each device on the SPI bus EZ LADDER Toolkit uses the on board PLC on a Chip SPI ports and general purpose outputs GPOs Only certain GPO pins may be used as the chip select Select the SPI port from
188. er automatically increments This number may be over written in this window if needed EZ Project Settings Target Version Options Version 0000 1 Build 0 2 Figure 4 2 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 33 Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Options Tab Settings The Options Tab will display the currently selected options and preferences Some of these options are tar get specific while others are standard Figure 4 3 shows the Options settings dialog box 1 Number of Rungs This is where the maximum number of rungs in the ladder diagram is specified The default number is 100 rungs Inserting or Deleting rungs in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram Q project will change this number accordingly This number should be considered a starting number of rungs If the number of rungs is not sufficient for the program size return to this dialog and adjust the number of rungs The number of rungs may be adjusted at any time EZ Project Settings Target Version Options Ladder Number of rungs 100 1 Figure 4 3 Selecting the Hardware Target As discussed in a previous section using the dialogs select the target from the list If required select the actual model number configure any features that you wish to use and click Chapter 20 Hardware Targets includes additional information for each supported hardware target To save the target select
189. er2 EEC2 91 92 558 559 974 1437 8 61444 Electronic Engine Controller 1 EEC1 190 512 513 899 1483 1675 2432 8 61445 Electronic Transmission Control ETC2 162 163 523 524 526 ler 2 65251 Engine Configuration EC 5s 6 1542543 544 545 1712 1794 1846 65262 Engine Temperature 1 1s 6 52110 174175 176 1134 A TS P1 lil T 600 601 602 976 966 967 968 1237 1633 65266 FuciEconomy ooms stewsimis o Mu ee II 65271 Venice Electrical Power 1s 6 11415188718 e 65272 Transmission Fluids TF s 6 123124 126 127 177 8 64465 Joral 3 Axis Incline Sensor 50ms 4 64436 65546 8 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 251 Chapter 22 Function Reference KEYPAD KEYPAD Description EN 0 The KEYPAD function is used to allow users to input data This function requires the Key pad feature be installed on the target s hardware and software The keypad may be used in two ways The first is using the KEYPAD function This is MI KB useful for allowing a user to input numeric data The second is reading individual button presses as a digital input This is useful for menus See Chapter 10 Keypad Support for details on keypad use Using the KEYPAD for Numeric Input Keypad Function Block When EN is true the function is enabled Data
190. es This attribute is optional 3 Days The time duration in number of days 4 Hours The time duration in hours 5 Minutes The time duration is minutes 6 Seconds The time duration in seconds 7 Milliseconds The time duration in milliseconds The millisecond resolution is target specific and is shown in parenthesis Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 4T Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects 8 Retentive This check box is used to identify retentive variables variables that will store their current value on power loss and reload it automatically when power is restored This feature must be supported on the hardware target gd Add Timer JO oh N O Milliseconds D 25ms OK Figure 5 6 Keeping Variable Values on Power Loss In the event of a power loss to the target EZ LADDER Toolkit is designed to allow ladder diagram variables to be stored and then be reloaded when power is restored This is called the Retentive feature and variables must be configured as retentive as well as the hardware target must support this feature See Chapter 7 Retentive Variables for more details on the retentive feature Placing Objects and Drawing Links To place an object in an EZ LADDER Toolkit project select the object or function block from the tool bar or select the object or function block from the tool bar drop down menu Position the pointer in the ladder dia
191. es for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find 551 Figure 16 1 shows the Device Properties window n a Device Properties Figure 16 1 Click SS and click The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties window will now list the SSI as an installed device SPIO is automatically installed when the SSI is installed See Figure 16 2 Click close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project The SSI can now be utilized from the ladder diagram project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 139 Chapter 16 SSI Encoder ucl PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X Liescript SPI Bus 0 551 Bus Figure 16 2 Reading Values from a Graycode Absolute SSI Encoder With the SSI feature installed in the Project Settings and the actual encode connected to the target through any required interface circuits it s value is read using the GC SSI function block Using the SSI function block is a two step process When placing the function block the Gray Code SSI Properties dialog box will open See Figure 16 3 Use this dialog to configure the GC SSI function block ad Gray Code 551 Properties Name ac 551 Description SSI Port ssi 551 Clock Rate KHz Resolution bits 12 _ Ce Figure 16 3 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 140
192. field Output Select Output if the variable will actually represent a real world digital output on the target Selecting this option will require that physical address of the output to be entered in the Var I O Number field Internal Select Internal if the variable has no real world connection but is to be used internal in the ladder diagram project only Retentive This check box is used to identify retentive variables variables that will store their current value on power loss and reload it automatically when power is restored This feature must be supported on the hardware target This is where the physical address of real world I O points is entered This field is only used if the Variable Type is either Input or Output This is where default variable values are set An internal variable will be equal to this value unless it has been altered by the ladder diagram This is used to preset values in the ladder diagram for comparisons as well as other uses This field is optional 6 Address Register When the ladder diagram project is configured to use register based communications such as Modbus or OptiCAN the register assignment for the variable is configured in this field If left blank there is no assigned register This field only appears if a feature that will use a register is installed or supported on the hardware target and Projects Settings This field is optional Clicking the Epir button opens an additional dialog box wi
193. field enter the node ID that is to be monitored for communication loss and in the Timeout ms field enter the amount of time that communication is lost before the node status is changed in millisec onds When enabled the OPTICAN NODESTATUS block s Q output will be true if messages are received 0 from the actual node If the output is false then the node status is not valid as no messages received from it When this occurs the VAL output will be set to zero The OPTICAN NODESTATUS function block is node specific meaning that for each node that must be monitored for a network restart a separate function block is required In addition nodes that are considered critical in overall operation may require multiple uses of the OPTICAN NODESTATUS function block to identify errors and handle them correctly ad OptiCAN Node Status Properties Name DPTICAN NODESTATUS1 Description Figure 14 13 Click to place the function block in the ladder diagram project Figure 14 14 is a sample of a complete OPTICAN NODESTATUS circuit The Error variable shown will be equal to the status of the node that was programmed into the function block The error codes are listed earlier in this chapter Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 112 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking NODEST ModelErr Figure 14 14 Using the OptiCAN Configuration Tool Up to this point we have configured controllers
194. func tion is enabled P1 Input Output Connections The AVG function block placement requires connections of a minimum of three input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O The number of inputs is specified when the func tion is inserted The EN is always considered an input in the total number of inputs there P fore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used Type integer Res Boolean Timer Active Sate Other Details o p X o p me Lom oma X wa f x LLL ow X X Example Circuit Related Functions MAVG Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 219 Chapter 22 Function Reference BIT PACK PACK Description EN The BIT PACK is a configurable function that will convert the inputs bits from binary to a single 32 bit integer number The Bx inputs are the bits to pack the EN enables the function when true The Q output is true when the function is enabled The output O is the 32 bit integer result of the packed inputs The number of bits must be identified when the function is placed in the ladder diagram 1 32 bits Only boolean variables or contacts may be used as bit inputs Included in the configuration is the bit offset The bit offset allows the programmer to use multiple BIT PACK functions and have a single 32 bit output integer by offsetting the bit range fo
195. g certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels PWM Outputs ADS7841 A D SPI Hardware Counter SPI Slave ADS8341 A D SPI HDIO Bus Synchronous Serial Interface SSI DAC7612 D A SPI Retentive Variables Serial Printing LS7366R CNTR SPI Keypad Support Modbus Slave OptiCAN Networking LCD Display Support Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WARITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Grey Scale Encoder GC 551 Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Counter Quadrature CNTR LS7366R Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Keypad KEYPAD Latching Coil LATCH EEPROM Storage J1939 Communications LCD Clear LCD CLEAR LCD Print LCD PRINT Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Bitwise NOT NOT
196. gets Understanding Targets Targets is the term used in the EZ LADDER Toolkit to describe the actual electronic hardware controller or Programmable Logic Controller PLC to which the ladder diagram is specifically written to operate on Generally most ladder diagrams can be utilized on different hardware targets with only minor changes to the ladder diagram program itself Each hardware target is unique in that each usually have differing number of inputs outputs analog I O and other features Due to the differences in each EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project the actual target must be identified selected and it s optional features if any installed and configured properly Refer to Chapter 20 Hardware Targets for specific target details for each supported target Controllers etc typically have minimal features that require additional configuration after the actual hardware target is selected while targets such as the PLC on a Chip require you to install and configure each and every I O point device and feature you intend to use It is important to understand that using PLC targets such as PCS Controllers Harsh Environment 0 Failure to correctly select install or configure a feature the Project Settings may result in the target not operating as anticipated or features and functions not showing available for the target For a target to be able to use the compiled ladder diagram program created using the EZ LADDER Too
197. guo senec var E ERN RUE aEP VPE MNT 165 PLCMOD M2 12800 X area ul 165 PECMOD M2712BU DX 166 2 2 167 2 25601 eR CP 168 PLCMOD M2 25620X PLCMOD M2 25630X 169 PLCMOD M2 25621X PLCMOD M2 25631X 170 Enhanced Baby Bear PLC Models eene eee 171 e I MM 171 Le uil MP 172 00 Logis ovi din v vn uda Uca ta d Ui RD 173 1G EB B400 M 174 84 eG 175 ICM EBB 600 oo MUERE oA dx Dru RM EHE RUNE 176 jM gt OG 177 Harsh Environment PLC Models eere 178 SESTO acinis ciao EM ES d M wi Rr 178 nx ER qm 179 pz SAU Cl m
198. hanced Baby Bear will open a new dialog and allow selection of the target by it s model number ICM EBB XXX Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 32 Chapter 4 Configuring Targets 4 Properties When a target has been selected the properties button may appear target specific If this button appears clicking the PRoPERTIES will allow additional configurations for the selected target This button is only available on certain targets Properties may include J1939 PWM and Opti CAN 5 Optional Buttons When certain targets are selected like the PRoPERTIES button other buttons may appear These additional buttons that are target specific are used to configure items like Modbus Communications and more Version Tab Settings The Version Tab will display the current build and version of the ladder diagram that is currently active in the EZ LADDER Toolkit The build and version information is useful when determining if a program version is current Figure 4 2 shows the Version settings tab of the Project Setting Window Version setting may be changed in this window if required 1 Version Number A version number for the ladder diagram may be entered here This number will not change automatically It must be manually adjusted for each revision or release of the ladder diagram project 2 Build Number The current build number is displayed here Each time the ladder diagram project is Compiled the build numb
199. he encoder s documentation for this setting Mode Master C Slave TP SSI P ssi Resolution Resolution of the Encoder This is encoder EE dm DENEN dependent Refer the encoder s documen tation for this setting o Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 230 Chapter 22 Function Reference GETDATE GETDATE Description EN Q The GETDATE function reads the current date from the hardware real time clock The values of the date are stored into the integer variables on the output pins The enable EN must be true for the GETDATE function to be enabled The Q output is true when the function is enabled The MN output returns the month 1 12 the DY output returns the MN day of the month 1 31 the YR output returns the current year last two digits and the WD returns the day of the week 1 7 1 Sunday The MN DY YR and WD outputs must be connected to Integer variables Input Output Connections DY The GETDATE function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and five output pins Q MN DY YR WD worm Type Integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Lm trot X ave Tue ow x owe x Ll Lo owe X LR X wo wo owe x Example Circuit CRI GETDATE EN Q MN j Month DY YR WD eekday Related Functions GETTIME SETTIME
200. he number entered the Address Register displayed will be updated immediately The CAN_ and the register number is automatically entered When this ladder diagram project is running value of the variable OilPSI will be transmitted globally to all nodes at register 25 The interval will the same as Broadcast Rate that was configured in the Project Set tings Listening for Broadcasts While broadcasting can be global or to a specific node ID all listening for broadcasts are specific For a controller to listen for a broadcast the specific node ID and register are required To listen for a broadcast a variable must be identified and assigned to use an OptiCAN register To assign an OptiCAN register to a variable using the Add Variable or Edit Variable dialog click the Epir button next to the Address Register field See Figure 14 11 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 110 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking ad Add Variable owa Description Variable Type Input Var Number Output Default Value nternal Address Register Edit Cancel Retentive Figure 14 11 The Edit Address Register dialog box will open See Figure 14 12 Using the drop down menu select CAN OptiCAN Fill in the Node ID with the node ID number of the device you wish to listen for Fill in the Register Number that you are listening for on the specific node The register n
201. heck this information If you are still unable to activate EZ LADDER Toolkit Contact Divelbiss Customer Support If the information is not valid registration will fail Activation fail due to an incorrect Serial 6 Copy Paste or type the Counter Key into the B Counter Key form box in the EZ LADDER Toolkit NENNT Activation Window Click PROCEED Visit divelbizs cam praducts saftware E Ladder activate aspe ar call 1 800 245 2327 to activate this product Provide the Activation printed below and your user information and you will be a provided with a Counter Key Type or copy amp paste the provided Counter 7 A Dialog box will appear verifying that EZ LADDER Key below then click Proceed has successfully been activated Activation Rey Counter Rey Cancel Proceed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 11 Chapter 1 Getting Started Installing Additional Copies of EZ LADDER Toolkit The EZ LADDER Toolkit license agreement allows the EZ LADDER Toolkit to be installed on up to two computers usually PC and a laptop To install on a second computer install the EZ LADDER Toolkit and Activate it as was done on the original computer If you attempt to activate a serial more than two time unless you have purchased a site license the activation will fail as the serial number has been activated the maximum number of allowed times If you are re i
202. i below ii In the event either party initiates mediation of the Dispute by sending a written notice of mediation to the other party then the Dispute shall be subject to mediation in Mt Vernon Ohio before a single mediator to be proposed in the first instance by the party initiating mediation who will be reasonably familiar with the computer industry and mutually acceptable to the parties The parties agree to participate in such mediation in good faith through representatives with due authority to settle any such Dispute If such representatives are unable to resolve such Dispute within twenty 20 business days after commencing mediation then each party may pursue whatever further recourse it deems necessary to protect its rights under this Agreement Licensee agrees that any violation of this Agreement related to the Licensed Software or Confidential Information specifically including Divelbiss s proprietary rights therein is likely to result in irreparable injury to Divelbiss Accordingly notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement to the contrary Licensee agrees that Divelbiss shall be entitled to all appropriate relief from any court of competent jurisdiction whether in the form of injunctive relief and or monetary damages to protect its proprietary rights in the Licensed Software and Confidential Information and Support In consideration of the payment of annual maintenance and support fees by or on behalf of Licens
203. idential Information in its possession and will certify in writing to Divelbiss that it has done so All provisions regarding ownership confidentiality proprietary rights payment of fees and royalties indemnification disclaimers of warranty and limitations of liability will survive termination of this Agreement 13 Assignment and Sublicensing This Agreement the license granted hereunder and the Licensed Software may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred or conveyed by Licensee to any third party without the express written consent of Divelbiss 14 Dispute Resolution a 15 Maintenance a b 6 General a In the event of any dispute arising between the parties related to the subject matter of this Agreement except regarding the payment of fees under Sections 3 or 15 of this Agreement or as provided in Subsection b below Dispute the parties agree to attempt to resolve such Dispute according to the procedures set forth below i In the event either Divelbiss or Licensee notifies the other party of a Dispute representatives of each party with adequate authority to settle such Dispute will promptly engage in direct negotiations If such representatives are unable to resolve such Dispute within ten 10 business days after commencing negotiations or twenty 20 business days after the initial notice of Dispute then either party may initiate mediation of the Dispute as provided in Subsection a i
204. ies window will close and the previous target properties window will now list the LCD as an installed device Click the LCD in the device list A PRoPERTIES button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 9 2 Gl PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X LCD Display Figure 9 2 Click the PRoPERTIES button The Lcd Properties dialog box will open In this dialog box select the LCD port on which the LCD will be physically connected LCD A LCD B or LCD C Please refer to the schematic of your PLC on a Chip design for the correct port See to Figure 9 3 Enter the number of LCD display rows 1 4 and the number of LCD columns 8 40 Click ok to close the L cd Port dialog box See Figure 9 3 The display is now configured and the current settings must be saved ud Lcd Properties el d PILI LCD on GPOS GPO15 Figure 9 3 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 15 Chapter 9 LCD Display Support Click close the Target s properties and click again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project The LCD display can now be utilized from the ladder diagram project Displaying Messages on the LCD Display With the LCD display configured in the ladder diagram project it is now possible to use the EZ LADDER Toolkit s function blocks to display messages and variables Two basic function blocks that are used control the disp
205. ignments and uses should be defined as these register number will be needed to broadcast and listen 3 The heartbeat node should be identified To broadcast to nodes several steps must take place in addition to the configurations listed above For the OptiCAN network to function correctly several steps must be taken Before any node can broadcast or listen the OptiCAN Network must be started To Start the OptiCAN Network The OPTICAN TXNETMSG function block is used to send global network commands to all OptiCAN nodes on a network Using this function block a controller may send a Network Start Network Stop or a Net work Reset command On power up the OptiCAN network does NOT start by default and will not begin communication 0 until one controller has sent the Network Start command To send the start command the OPTICAN TXNETMSOG function block is used Using the OPTICAN _ TXNETMSG function block is a two step process When placing the function block the OptiCAN Transmit Network Message dialog box will open See Figure 14 5 Using the drop down menu select the Network Message Start Network a OptiCAN Transmit Network Message Name TXNETMSG1 Description Network Message Start Network Figure 14 5 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 108 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking Click to place the function block in the ladder diagram project Figure 14 6 is a
206. igure 6 2 for identification status fields Project Version Estimated Scan Time Tool Bar Project Name Project Build EZ EZ Ladder Standard Ladder Diagram Project Sex EZ File Wdit View Project Reports Window Hap Dew semis Xo ZACISE II OM A Status S Program Name Program Version EE Build Number CR1 CR2 Contacts H Functions Variables CR2 DI CR3 Labels 6 4 n Ready Figure 6 2 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 57 Chapter 6 Downloading amp Running Projects The following descriptions are for buttons found on the Monitor Mode Tool Bar Edit Edit Mode Switches EZ LADDER Toolkit to the Edit Mode Connect Connects EZ LADDER Toolkit to the hardware targets Programming Port Disconnect Disconnects EZ LADDER Toolkit from the hardware target Download Transfers the compiled ladder diagram project to the hardware target and saves the program in memory and starts executing the program The program will remain until over written by a new downloaded program Stop Stops execution of the ladder diagram project on the hardware target Go Starts execution of the ladder diagram project on the hardware target Ta rg Target Information Opens the a target information dialog that identifies the actual target Into version connected to EZ LADDER Toolkit a
207. inant SR Falling Edge Detect TRIG Subtraction SUB High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Convert to Timer TIMER Hysteresis HYSTER Time Delay Off TOF Convert to Integer INTEGER Time Delay On TON J1939 Receive J1939 SPN Pulse Timer TP Latching Coil LATCH Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Limit LIMIT Bitwise XOR XOR Indicates with an Expansion Option Installed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 191 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC HMI C415X E R Features OptiCAN Networking Serial Printing 2 Counter Inputs Retentive Variables 4x20 Display 4 PWM Outputs EEPROM Storage Programmable Buttons LEDS 2 15 bit Analog Inputs J1939 Communications Programmable Beeper Current Feedback for PWM Outputs 5232 422 485 Serial Port Display Heater 2 Relay Outputs Modbus Slave 6 Digital Inputs Optional Expansion Features Up to 4 PWM Capable Outputs 12 bit DAC Outputs Quadrature Counter Type K Thermocouple Inputs 10 bit Analog Input 5V 10V 20mA Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Moving Average MAVG Less Than Equal To lt Maximum MAX Not Equal To lt gt Minimum MIN Equal To Modulo MOD EEPROM Read EEPROM READ Multiplication MULT EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS Greater Than gt OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Greater Than Equal To gt Bitwise NOT NOT Absolute Value ABS Bitwise OR OR Addition
208. int this text Serially Figure 11 4 When all the information is entered clicking will cause the function block to be placed in the ladder dia gram project Figure 11 5 is a sample of a complete SERIAL PRINT circuit CHI HIAL PRIN ER Error Figure 11 5 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 87 Chapter 11 Serial Printing Support Transmitting Variables Serially In addition to transmitting static text it is often desirable to be able to transmit variables to another device To transmit a variable using the serial port the same SERIAL PRINT function block is still used As in trans mitting text the text is entered into the Text field In addition to the text control characters may be inserted that represent variables and how to format the variable text For a full listing of what control characters and formatting is supported please see the SERIAL PRINT function block in Chapter 22 Function Reference Figure 11 6 illustrates a sample text dialog with control characters a Serial Print Properties Name SERIAL PRINTI Description Text 061 54 Figure 11 6 When a SERIAL_PRINT function is used to transmit variables a new variable input is added to the function block automatically for each variable that will be transmitted Figure 11 represents a sample ladder diagram project using a SERIAL_PRINT function block with a variable input that will be transmitted The SERIAL
209. integer variable was automatically created This variable holds the status of the controllers restart This variable may be used to identify if the device is restarting from a power failure restarting from a low power mode or other start up This variable is named StartupStatus Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 207 Chapter 21 Low Power Mode The StartupStatus variable will be one of the following when the controller begins operating No status is known this is seen after the StartupStatus variable is reset in the ladder diagram 1 Power on Reset This indicates that power was applied to start the controller 2 Recover from Low Power Mode This indicates the wakeup input restarted the controller from sleep mode 3 Error This indicates that an error was detected and the watchdog reset the controller The StartupStatus variable is set the first scan of the ladder diagram and will maintain the value until itis cleared in the program itself Ideally once the status has been identified and used in the ladder diagram program the program should set the StartupStatus variable to a negative 1 1 This can be done using the Integer function block A negative 1 setting will then cause the StartupStatus vari able to reset to zero 0 Only a negative 1 is allowed to be written to the StartupStatus variable Figure 21 6 shows an example of using the Integer function block to reset the StartupStatus vari
210. ion ADD Bitwise OR OR Bitwise AND AND Pulse With Modulation PWM Average AVG PWM Frequency PWM_FREQ Bit Pack PACK Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Real REAL Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Rotate Left ROL Compare CMP Rotate Right ROR Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Count Down CTD Select SEL Count Up CTU Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Count Up Down CTUD oet Date SETDATE Division DIV Set Time SETTIME Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Shift Left SHL Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Shift Right SHR Get Date GETDATE Set Reset Set Dominant SR Get Time GETTIME Subtraction SUB High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Convert to Timer TIMER Hysteresis HYSTER Time Delay Off TOF Convert to Integer INTEGER Time Delay On TON J1939 Receive J1939 SPN Pulse Timer TP Latching Coil LATCH Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Limit LIMIT Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 178 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC 150X E R Features Analog Inputs 2 Channels Hardware Counters 2 Channels Output Monitoring Real Time Clock Retentive Variables J1939 Communications OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage Optional Multipurpose Serial Port PWM Outputs Programmable Status LED Reduced Power Mode Sleep Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To
211. ion you must save the ladder diagram project using the Save or Save As menu items Hardware Target Selections are for the currently open and active EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project only For each new project you must repeat the hardware target selection and configuration pro Cess Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 34 Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Viewing Target Information EZ LADDER Toolkit provides includes a built in quick reference tool to identify what I O Analog and func tions are supported by a target The first step is selecting a hardware target as previously shown To view the target supported features from the View menu click Target Information The Target Information win dow will open as shown in Figure 4 4 This window identifies the Target Name Minimum Target Kernel Version that is needed for this version of EZ LADDER Toolkit Supported Objects and Function Blocks Analog Inputs Digital Inputs and Digital Out puts The Target Information is printable using the PRINT button Target Information a Target HEC 4000 Minimum Target Version 1 0 0 0 Less than or equal Not equal Equal Greater Greater of equal Absolute value Add Bitwise AND Average Bit Pack Bit Unpack Convert to BOOLEAN Compare Hardware Counter Timer HDIO 010 00 gt 15 HDIO 000 00 gt 007 15 GPIO gt GPI33 GPOO gt GPOSZ Figure 4 4 Divelbiss Corporation
212. is active the OTR register is loaded with the actual count register value The OTR register is used to read the current count Asynchronous Index n quadrature mode if index is active it is applied acted on regardless of its phase relationship to inputs A and B Synchronous Index n quadrature mode If index is active it must meed the phase relationship of inputs A and B before it can be applied acted on Clock Filter Div by 1 Filter Frequency divided by 1 This is based on the input frequency of A and B inputs Div by 2 Filter Frequency divided by 2 This is based on the input frequency of A and B inputs LFLAG DFLAG Flag on IDX When index is true the LFLAG will set and latch while DFLAG will be set only while the condition is maintained Flag on CMP When actual count value value of the DTR register the LFLAG will set and latch while DFLAG will be set only while the condition is maintained Flag on BW When enabled when counter wraps from zero to maximum the LFLAG will set and latch while DFLAG will be set only while the condition is maintained Flag on CY When enabled when counter wraps from maximum to zero the LFLAG will set and latch while DFLAG will be set only while the condition is maintained The DFLAG and LFLAG is typically read using digital inputs that are specific to each target Refer to the target s User Manual In addition to the hardware inputs that control the LS7366R the CNTR LS7366R function bloc
213. jects Saving an open ladder diagram project can be done two ways Click the Save button on the tool bar or use the File Menu and choose Save the project has not been previously saved a dialog box will appear to enter name and save the project The Save As selection in the File Menu always provides a dialog box for naming the project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 51 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Verifying and Compiling Ladder Diagrams After a ladder diagram has been created it must be verified and compiled prior to downloading it to an ac tual hardware target This process checks the ladder diagram for adherence to all EZ LADDER Toolkit and target rules and then creates a file that will be downloaded to the hardware target This file while main taining the functionality of the ladder diagram actually has no graphical representation and is generally not recognizable or viewable To Verify a Project The verification process will check the ladder diagram for completeness and common rules verifying there are not broken links etc To verify the ladder diagram project on the tool bar click the Verify button In the Output Window at the bottom a message will be displayed with the status and results of the verification process To Compile a Project The compilation process involves two actions The first is an automatic verification is done and if no prob lems are detected the ladde
214. k is used in EZ LADDER to read the count reset the count and control the registers Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 222 Chapter 22 Function Reference Function Block Inputs EN RC LD LC PD PC Function block enable Boolean When true the function block is enabled Read Count Input Boolean When true the actual count is internally copied to OTR and then OTR is output at the count output CT When false the OTR is output at the count output CT without copying the actual count Load DTR input Boolean When true the DTR register is loaded with the value of the variable connected to the PD input When using LC and LD LC has a higher priority and will execute first before LD Load Counter input Boolean When true the value of PC is loaded into the DTR register and then the DTR register is copied to the actual count When using LC and LD LC has a higher priority and will execute first before LD Value Integer to be loaded into DTR when LD input is true Value Integer to be loaded into DTR and then actual count when LC is true Function Block Outputs CE DR ST CT Output Boolean is true when the function block is enabled and no errors are present Direction output Boolean Identifies the current count direction or 1 Status output Integer The output provides a numeric represtation of the status of the LS7366R current function Consult factory if mo
215. kit User Manual 60 Chapter 6 Downloading amp Running Projects Downloading Ladder Diagram Projects to Targets When connected to a hardware target click the Download button located on the tool bar A dialog box will temporarily be displayed showing the status of the ladder diagram s download to the target and the Status field will indicate Downloading Upon completion of the download the Status field will update and indicate Running The target has now been programmed with the ladder diagram project A download action causes the project to download for the project to be saved in the target s non volatile memory and then it is given a execute command to begin running on the target The project is now executing on the hardware target The status of contacts coils function blocks variables and power flow may be viewed in real time Disconnecting from the target or changing to Edit Mode does not stop the target from operating as it can only be stopped by removing power or the use of the Stop button in the Monitor Mode It is important that all ladder diagram projects be archived for safe keeping There is no method to recover a ladder diagram project from the target The actual ladder diagram file must be available for editing and future downloads Real Time Features When connected to a hardware target with an executing program there are additional real time monitoring features available in the EZ LADDER Toolkit These features inc
216. l be necessary to draw a horizontal link between the contact and coil on rung 1 Select the Horizontal Link Tool from the tool bar Refer to Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit for details on tool bars and buttons To draw the link click and hold the click at the location where the link will start at the right side of the contact on rung 1 Holding the mouse button down clicked drag the pointer to the left side of the coil on rung 1 When the link is drawn connecting both objects release the mouse button to complete the link If a vertical links are required as in parallel circuits select the Vertical Link Tool from the tool bar Using the same method click and drag until a vertical link is created Horizontal and Vertical links snap to grid locations and can only be started and stopped at one of these locations Take care when connecting links to objects and function blocks that the link actually connects to the block and not just near it If a link does not connect then an error will occur when Verifying or Compiling the ladder diagram project Figure 5 8 shows a connected link and a link that is not connected Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 49 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects r EZ EZ Ladder Standard Ladder Diagram Project Name did EZ File Edit View Project Reports Window Help amp t JMP Edit Inst k Label Sare Vars ig C Ab
217. lay are LCD CLEAR and LCD PRINT Clearing the Display To clear the LCD display blank all rows and columns the LCD CLEAR function block is used The LCD CLEAR will clear the display when it senses a rising edge on it s enable input EN Figure 9 4 shows an example program using the LCD CLEAR function block CHI CD CLEAHI Figure 9 4 Writing to the Display To write messages to the LCD Display the LCD PRINT function block is used Using the LCD PRINT func tion block is a two step process When placing the function block a new Lcd Print Properties dialog box will open See Figure 9 5 The Text field is where the message is typed that will be displayed The Row field is the row of the display where the text will be displayed The Column field is the column where the text will begin displaying ud Lcd Print Properties Mame Lco PRINTI Description Text Hello World Figure 9 5 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 76 Chapter 9 LCD Display Support The first row and first column are always zero 0 and are limited by the actual hardware target Q display size If text in a row is more than can be displayed on the LCD it will be truncated It does not automatically wrap to the next line Each row of the display must be written to individually with separate LCD PRINT function blocks When all the information is entered clicking will cause the function block to be placed in the lad
218. lean Timer ActiveState Other Details ma X Cater Ce om X LC of owe X LLL _ foe p LLL Example Circuit Related Functions OR AND XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 266 Chapter 22 Function Reference NOT EQUAL TO lt gt NOT EQUAL TO Description EM The NOT EQUAL TO provides an if greater than or less than comparison for the Px inputs The number of inputs is specified when the object is placed The output Q is true if P1 is not equal to P2 and P2 is not equal to P3 and so on The enable EN must be true for the NOT EQUAL TO function to be enabled P1 Input Output Connections The NOT EQUAL TO function block placement requires connections of at least 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and one output pin Q The EN is always considered an input in the total p number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used worm Type Integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Other Dorais E ma TT X A amp wme o o Lom oma X OX Pd dC otras nario ea Example Circuit Yaluel Value Related Functions lt gt gt lt Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 267 Chapter 22 Function Reference OPTICAN NODESTATUS Description The OPTICAN NODESTATUS function istens for OK of the sta
219. lect SEL Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 177 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets Harsh Environment PLC Models Each Harsh Environment Controller HEC model supports different features and function blocks based the base PLC on a Chip processor and different peripherals on board When HEC model HEC XXXX is selected in the Project Settings all the supported features and function blocks are installed auto matically HEC 100X E R Features Analog Inputs 2 Channels Hardware Counters 2 Channels Output Monitoring Real Time Clock Retentive Variables J1939 Communications OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage Optional Multipurpose Serial Port PWM Outputs Programmable Status LED Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Moving Average MAVG Less Than Equal To lt Maximum MAX Not Equal To lt gt Minimum MIN Equal To Modulo MOD EEPROM Read EEPROM READ Multiplication MULT EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS Greater Than gt OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET Greater Than Equal To gt MSG Absolute Value ABS Bitwise NOT NOT Addit
220. lect the items desired to be included on the Cross Refer ence Report The items to select are Input Output Internal Function Unused Variables Contact without Coil Coil without Contact This will include all real world inputs on the report This will include all real world outputs on the report This will include all internal contacts and coils on the report This will include all functions function blocks used on the report This will list any variables that are in the ladder diagram project but are not actually used in the ladder diagram itself created but not used This will list all contacts that have been created and are used in the ladder diagram but have no coil used in the ladder diagram This will list all coils that have been created and are used in the ladder diagram but have no contacts used in the ladder diagram Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 144 Chapter 17 EZ LADDER Toolkit Reports Drum Sequencer Tables This will include all drum sequencer matrix tables on the report Retentive Variables This lists all variables all types that are configured to be retentive Network Address Register This lists the variables and network addresses on the report only variables with network addresses are listed For each option selected in the dialog box the report is generated identifying the rung number type and description for each item Click ok to generate the re
221. lity and design To send a global broadcast a variable must be identified and assigned to use an OptiCAN register To as sign an OptiCAN register to a variable using the Add Variable Edit Variable dialog click the button next to the Address Register field See Figure 14 7 ad Add Variable Name loPS Description Variable Type Input Var Number C Output Default nternal Address Register Edit _ Retentive Figure 14 7 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 109 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking The Edit Address Register dialog box will open See Figure 14 8 Using the drop down menu select CAN OptiCAN Fill in the Register Number only to transmit to the same register on all nodes The regis ter number must be a user defined register 0 127 Leaving the Node ID blank causes this variable to be sent to the same register number on all nodes on the network Global Broadcast Using the Broadcast drop down menu select a broadcast trigger The choices are None Specified Inter val Change of State and Specified Interval and Change of State This register will be broadcast when this condition is met Click to close the dialog and click to close the Add Edit Variable dialog a Edit Address Register Register Number OK Figure 14 8 As the register type is selected and t
222. lkit it must also have its kernel installed The kernel is the hardware target s basic operating system or bios The kernel is required before any programs can be installed The kernels for targets are automatically installed on your computer when the EZ LADDER Toolkit is installed They are typically found in C Program Files Divelbiss EZ Ladder Kernel Hardware targets ship from the factory without a kernel installed The kernel must installed prior to downloading the first ladder diagram program The target is shipped without a kernel to provided greater flexibility in version control The Project Settings Window To create a ladder diagram project in EZ LADDER Toolkit you must first select the hardware target If you attempt to place any ladder diagram objects in the workspace prior to selecting a target the Project Settings Window will open requiring you to select the target automatically EZ LADDER Toolkit uses the target selec tion to filter and display only ladder diagram objects and functions supported by the selected target Only the actual hardware target that will be used should be selected Selecting a different target will the use of objects and function blocks that may not be supported by the actual hardware target as well as not allow use of objects and function blocks that are supported To select the target either try to place a ladder diagram object in the workspace or use the Project Menu and click Settings The Project
223. ll modifications thereof by whomever made are and shall remain the sole and exclusive property of Divelbiss LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT VARIOUS ASPECTS AND FEATURES OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE MAY BE PROTECTED UNDER APPLICABLE PATENT COPYRIGHT TRADEMARK AND TRADE SECRET LAW AND THAT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY DIVELBISS LICENSEE MAY NOT USE DISCLOSE OR REPRODUCE OR DISTRIBUTE ANY COPIES OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE IN WHOLE OR IN PART NOR AUTHORIZE OR PERMIT OTHERS TO DO SO Licensee further acknowledges that any applications made by Licensee using the Licensed Software including any incorporated into Resulting Products are derivative works made solely with the authorization of Divelbiss in consideration for which Licensee agrees to provide upon request from Divelbiss copies of all such applications to Divelbiss and grants to Divelbiss a perpetual irrevocable royalty free license to and use such applications so long as Divelbiss is not competing with Licensee Licensee shall not nor will it assist others in attempting to decompile reverse engineer or otherwise re create the source code for or functionality of the Licensed Software Licensee shall not use the Licensed Software for the purpose of developing any similar or competing product or assisting a third party to develop a similar or competing product At no expense to Divelbiss Licensee will take any action including executing any document requested by
224. ll down and find SPI Slave Figure 15 1 shows the Device Properties window a Device Properties SPI Bus 0 SPI Bus 1 SSI Bus Figure 15 1 Click SP Slave and click ox The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties window will now list the SPI Slave as an installed device Click the SPI Slave in the device list A PROPER ries button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 15 2 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 119 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support a PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X LCD Display Figure 15 2 Click the PROPERTIES button The Spi Slave Properties dialog box will open In this dialog box select the SPI port to use from the available drop down list Select the Clock Phase Clock Polarity and Bit order that is required for the SPI bus See Figure 15 3 u Spi Slave Properties SPI Port ETE gt Clock Phase Middle Clock Polarity Active High Bit Order 5 First Figure 15 3 Click ok close the Target s properties and click again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project The SPI Slave is now configured A thorough understanding SPI and your specific SPI is required to be able to configure and use the hardware target as an SPI Slave device on your bus O Any SPI Slave settings that do not appear or are not changeable are
225. locks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM_ SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Optional Multipurpose Serial Port Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 184 Chapter 20 H
226. lude Power Flow indication Scan Time Starting and Stopping program execution hover boxes and the ability to change variable values Power Flow Indication Monitoring a project in real time provides the ability to watch the state of contacts coils function blocks and variables See Figure 6 7 Contacts and Coils are actually represented in their current state On Off by color Blue represents the contact or coil in it s rest state un powered state while Red represents a pow ered or flow condition As real world and internal objects change during program execution they are repre sented in color accordingly and the flow of power can be viewed Power Flow from the left power rail to the right power rail Although contacts and coils change colors based on their actual state some links may change color but most links and all function blocks remain the standard black and white color Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 61 Chapter 6 Downloading amp Running Projects EZ EZ Ladder Standard AnotherProgram did EZ File Edit View Project Reports Window Help e Status Running Program Name AnotherProgram Red Indicates Power Flow Build Number B Scan Time ms po 10 Program Version 0 0 0 0 CRI E Coils IE Contacts Functions Variables CR2 DIV CR3 i Labels Bit3 VarOut Blue Indicates 5
227. me devices utilize lower register numbers this will ensure that the controller register assignments will not interfere with the device register assignments All OptiCAN controllers have the ability to broadcast send data and isten receive data OptiCAN Control lers may broadcast to all units on the network called nodes or specifically to only one node When broad casting to all nodes this is called a Global Broadcast While all controllers may broadcast and listen ideally one should be identified as a controlling agent for the network This agent controller should be responsible for the network commands that start stop and reset the OptiCAN network communications Hardware Requirements amp Recommendations For optimal functionality performance and noise immunity all the hardware recommendations must 0 followed Afailure to follow recommended hardware requirements could result in decreased reliability of the OptiCAN Network Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 100 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking Please adhere to the following requirements and recommendations 1 The OptiCAN network cable should be of a twisted pair with shield variety and cannot exceed 40 meters in total length Additional length or incorrect cable type may limit functionality or cause the network to fail Please adhere to the following specifications for cable requirements for all OptiCAN networks Twisted Pair Shielde
228. n Horizontal Tab Single Quotation Mark Double Quotation Mark Literal Question Mark BackSlash ASCII character in Octal notation ASCII character in Hexadecimal notation Unicode character in Hexadecimal notation if used in a wide character constant or a Unicode string literal Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 283 Chapter 22 Function Reference SETDATE SETDATE Description EN Q The SETDATE function sets the current date on the hardware real time clock The date is set by using variables to apply values to each of the inputs The enable EN must be true for the SETDATE function to be enabled The Q output is true when the function is en abled The MN input sets the month 1 12 the DY input sets the day of the month 1 31 the YR input sets the current year last two digits and the WD sets the day of the week MN 1 7 1 Sunday The MN DY YR and WD inputs must be connected to Integer variables Input Output Connections The SETDATE function block placement requires connections of 5 input pins EN MN DY YR WD and one output pin Q Output YR WD Example Circuit CRI SETDATE1 EN Q Month MN Day f DY YR WD Related Functions SETTIME GETTIME GETDATE Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 284 Chapter 22 Function Reference SETTIME SETTIME Description EN The SETTIME function sets the current time on the hardware real time
229. n M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 14 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit EZ LADDER Toolkit Menus The EZ LADDER Toolkit has many features and options Basic commands features and options are used and controlled through drop down menus Figure 2 2 shows the standard EZ LADDER Toolkit Menu bar As with any Windows based application clicking on a menu heading will cause the drop down menu to open EZ File Edit View Project Reports Window Help Figure 2 2 The menus found in the EZ LADDER Toolkit are File Edit View Project Reports Window and Help Some of these menus are specific to EZ LADDER Toolkit features while others are part of the basic Windows struc ture FILE MENU The FILE Menu includes the standard windows functionality for file control and printing The FILE Menu items are New Open Close Save Save As Print Print Preview Print Setup and Exit A recently opened file list is also included for quick recall of recently opened ladder diagram projects New The New menu item is used to create a new blank EZ LADDER Toolkit Ladder Diagram Project Open The Open menu item is select and open a previously saved EZ LADDER Toolkit Ladder Diagram Project Close The Close menu item closes the currently selected EZ LADDER Toolkit Ladder Diagram Project Save The Save menu item is used to save the currently selected EZ LADDER Toolkit Ladder Diagram Project If the project has not been saved previously
230. n MULT EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS Greater Than gt OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Greater Than Equal To gt Bitwise NOT NOT Absolute Value ABS Bitwise OR OR Addition ADD Print to LCD LCD PRINT Bitwise AND AND Pulse With Modulation PWM Average AVG PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Bit Pack BIT PACK Quadrature Counter CNTR LS7366R Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Convert to Real REAL Compare CMP Rotate Left ROL Clear LCD LCD CLEAR Rotate Right ROR Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Count Down CTD Select SEL Count Up CTU Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Count Up Down CTUD Shift Left SHL Division DIV Shift Right SHR Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Set Reset Set Dominant SR Falling Edge Detect TRIG Subtraction SUB High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Convert to Timer TIMER Hysteresis HYSTER Time Delay Off TOF Convert to Integer INTEGER Time Delay On TON J1939 Receive J1939 SPN Pulse Timer TP Latching Coil LATCH Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Limit LIMIT Bitwise XOR XOR Indicates with an Expansion Option Installed Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 190 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC HMI C410X E R Features OptiCAN Networking Serial Printing 2 Counter Inputs Retentive Variables 4x20 Display 4 PWM Out
231. n the hardware PWM channel s frequency is changed from it s current value either from when the PWM channel was installed using the Target Settings menu or a PWM FREQ function F The FREQ only changes the hardware PWM channel s frequency with a low to high transition on EN This frequency will be maintained regardless of the EN state The only time this fre quency will change again is when the actual frequency input variable input F changes and the EN detects another low to high transition Q is true during the ladder diagram scan when the frequency is newly ap plied All other times the Q output is low When the PWM function is placed you must specify the actual PWM channel group CLK A or CLK B that the function will change the frequency to 0 If an invalid frequency is applied to input to then the Output will remain low as well as the actual PWM output Input Output Connections The PWM function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN F and one output pin Q worm type Integer Rest Boolean Timer ActiveState Oterbetals OE ma X Rising ese OE qom ut Frequency _ Output jJ X jJ Example Circuit M FHEG H3 CRI C EN Q F Related Functions PWM Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 274 Chapter 22 Function Reference REAL REAL Description EN 0 The REAL function converts the input P in
232. n EZ LADDER Toolkit cannot be opened for use This may caused when another application is using and locked the serial port as a resource Close the other application to correct this Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 147 Chapter 18 Troubleshooting ERROR programming target Monitor Mode EZ LADDER Toolkit detected an undefined error while attempting to store the project on the hardware target Repeat the download and store process to correct this issue Error staring program Program doesn t exist Monitor Mode The program that is trying to start does not exist on the target Download the program This is typically caused by clicking the Go button before the ladder diagram project is loaded on the target Error starting program Program could not be started Monitor Mode The program cannot be started Re compile and download the program Error while receiving packet Monitor Mode There was an error when receiving communications packets from the target File could not be opened Monitor Mode When downloading the program to target the file with the compiled code could not be opened The file could have been moved or deleted Compile the project and then download to the target Invalid File Editor Mode The file you are trying to open in EZ LADDER Toolkit is not a valid EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram file Invalid HEX file Monitor Mode When downloading to a target the file used to store compiled c
233. n of keypad functionality EZ LADDER Toolkit supports a basic 4 row 6 column keypad matrix This keypad matrix includes the numbers 0 9 Enter Clear Up Down Decimal Point and F1 F4 programmable function keys Using this keypad matrix and the built in EZ LADDER functions menus and user interactions may be programmed into a ladder diagram project Keypad support is based on actual hardware target specifications PLC on a Chip Integrated Circuits and Modules support Keypad functionality For PLCs and controllers refer to the supported features See Chapter 20 Hardware Targets Configuring the Keypad in the Project Settings To be able to use an keypad in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project the keypad must first be installed and configured As the PLC on a Chip is the most commonly used target for keypads it will be used as an example to install and configure an keypad matrix The keypad is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Proj ect Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the PRoPERTIES button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find Keypad Figure 10 1
234. n one 1 portable personal computer the EZ LADDER Toolkit i to develop test install configure and distribute certain applications on certain hardware devices such as programmable logic controllers each a Resulting Product and ii to configure the PLC ON A CHIP Kernel on designated processors which shall constitute Resulting Products b Licensee may copy the EZ LADDER Toolkit only for backup purposes Licensee may not amend modify decompile reverse engineer copy except as expressly authorized in Section 2 of this Agreement install on a network or permit use by more than a single user in whole or in part the Licensed Software or sublicense convey or purport to convey any such right to any third party d Licensee Licensee s customers and others who obtain Resulting Products are expressly prohibited from using in whole or in part the Licensed Software and any Resulting Product in any use or application i intended to sustain or support life ii for surgical implant iii related to the operation of nuclear facilities iv in which malfunction or failure could result in death or personal injury or v in environments otherwise intended to be fault tolerant 3 License Fee a Except when Licensee obtains the EZ LADDER Toolkit from an approved distributor or OEM pursuant to other fee arrangements Licensee will pay to Divelbiss the license fee for the EZ LADDER Toolkit specified in the applicable Divelbiss price
235. n variables require 2 bytes each EEPROM Memory Overview EEPROM memory is a non volatile memory meaning its values are kept in the event of a power loss that may be used to store data from variables The data may be stored and retrieved as needed The EEPROM memory is ideal for storing operational parameters of a program that don t change regularly but need the ability to change EEPROM memory is not suited for storing values or data that changes rapidly and must be stored at each change EEPROM technology provides a limited number of write cycles to an EEPROM location before it will fail This number of writes before failure is large from hundreds of thousands to millions and does not pose any issues for items that change occassionaly however if a process were to try and write once per second the number of writes would exceed the life of the EEPROM much faster Installing EEPROM Memory For M Series based PLC on a Chip targets the EEPROM functionality is automatically installed when the actual target is selected and configured using the Project Settings menu No additional configuration is required The size of the EEPROM memory is dependent upon the target itself Refer to the hardware target s user manual or contact Divelbiss for details on the amount of EEPROM memory available Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 66 Chapter 7 Retentive Variables Using EEPROM Memory EEPROM memory is accessed
236. nd function blocks based on the base PLC on a Chip processor and different peripherals on board When any Enhanced Baby Bear model ICM EBB XXX is selected in the Project Settings all the supported features and function blocks are installed auto matically ICM EBB 100 Features Retentive Variables EEPROM Storage Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR
237. nd objects to input user data and set points The keypad can be read using two methods The two methods are Integer and Real Variable entry using the Keypad Function block and the second is identifying discrete key presses using contacts Real and Integer Inputs using the Keypad Function Block To read data integer or real from the keypad the Keypad function block is used Select the keypad function block from the drop down menu and place it in the ladder diagram at the desired location The Keypad block will be inserted into the ladder diagram Each keypad function block has three inputs and three outputs As with all function blocks the EN enable will enable the keypad function block or disable it The MI and MA inputs are used to identify Minimum and Maximum allowed entries respectively The Q Output is true when the function is enabled The KB output will maintain the contents of the keypad buffer while KO is the actual value that was entered on the keypad and ENTER pressed Figure 10 4 represents a typical keypad function in a ladder diagram project The Keypad function block can be used to input real or integer variables When connecting a variable the type connected will limit all number inputs and outputs to the selected type all integer or all real KEYPAD1 EN Q MI Buffer MA KO Figure 10 4 Reading Discrete Key Presses using Contacts Before being able to read any key presses using the Discrete key method the la
238. nd the current Targets Name or Model Number EEPROM Erase This erases the EEPROM on the hardware target The target must support EEPROM storage for this feature to function There is no UNDO when erasing the EEPROM Once the EEPROM has been 0 erased all contents lost Take in erasing the EEPROM as to not lose valuable data Connecting to a Target To download a ladder diagram project to a hardware target it must first be connected to in the Monitor Mode To successfully connect to a target the Serial Port Settings in the Project Settings Window must match our computers setup the appropriate programming cable must be connected from the computer s se rial port to the hardware targets programming port and the hardware target must be turned on To connect to target click the Connect button located on the tool bar If an error occurs check the Serial Port Settings cable and target Also see Chapter 18 Troubleshooting Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 58 Chapter 6 Downloading amp Running Projects When connecting to a target additional dialog boxes may appear depending on if a ladder diagram project is currently loaded on the target if the name matches the currently open project s name and if the build number has changed When Target has no Project Loaded If the target does not have a previously loaded ladder diagram project then no dialog boxes will open when the Connect b
239. necting to a target the target specified in the ladder diagram project does not match the actual detected hardware target connected to the serial port Correct the target in the Project Settings Target does not support bootloader Monitor Mode This specific target is too old to support any bootloader functions Contact Support for options There is not enough room for the paste Increase the number of rungs Editor Mode There is not enough rung space to paste from the clipboard Increase the number of rungs where the paste is to occur There is not enough room to the right of the paste point Editor Mode There is not enough room at the insertion point to paste objects from the clipboard Paste the objects farther left This object must be place in the last column Editor Mode The selected object can only be placed in the last column All coils can only be placed in the last column Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 149 Chapter 18 Troubleshooting Timeout ERROR Entire packet was not received Monitor Mode During communication with a target part of a packet was lost or not received Timeout ERROR Target didn t respond Monitor Mode During communication with a target the target did not respond Check the cables connections target and Serial port settings in EZ LADDER Toolkit Undefined packet type Monitor Mode EZ Ladder has detected a undefined communications packet during communications with th
240. ngs will be available as variables in the EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project ADS8341 16 Bit Analog to Digital A D Converter The ADS8341 is a 16 bit Analog to Digital Converter integrated circuit with an SPI interface EZ LADDER Toolkit has built in software support for using this device on an SPI port EZ LADDER supported target At this time only PLC on a Chip or custom targets support the use of the ADS8341 A D Converter This chapter discusses the basics of using the ADS8341 in the ladder diagram and minor references to hardware when needed The ADS8341 is a hardware device and requires additional circuitry and knowledge to interface it an Although the ADS8341 is a 16 bit device in actuality it is 15 bits of resolution plus and minus 1 bit making 16 bits total Installing the ADS8341 in the Ladder Diagram Project To be able to use the ADS8341 in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project the ADS8341 must first be installed and configured As the PLC on a Chip is the most commonly used target for the ADS8341 it will be used as an example to install and configure the ADS8341 The ADS8341 is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the PRoPERTIESs button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the
241. not supported Q The SPI port 0 or 1 is added automatically when installing and configuring the SPI Slave Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 120 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support Using the SPI Slave Feature The SPI Slave feature provides an easy way to pass data to an SPI Master device The data is simply stored in registers that the SPI Master device will read There are a total of 512 registers each of which are 32 bit Assigning and Setting Slave Registers To use SPI Slave registers registers must be assigned to variables For more information regarding vari ables refer to Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects SPI Slave registers can be assigned by editing an existing variable when new variables are created To assign an SPI Slave register to a variable using the Add Variable or Edit Variable dialog click the button next to the Address Register field See Figure 15 4 uL Add Variable Figure 15 4 The Edit Address Register dialog box will open See Figure 15 5 Using the drop down menu select SP SPI Slave the Register box type the address number of the SPI Slave register 0 511 Edit Address Register Prefix 5 1_ SPI Slave Address Register sPt 12 Figure 15 5 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 121 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support Click to close the Edit Address Register dialog box and ret
242. nous Serial Interface SSI Encoder Input EZ LADDER Toolkit supports the use of Synchronous Serial Interface SSI Encoders SSI Encoders pro vide the ability for absolute positioning The SSI Encoder feature is not supported on all targets Refer to Chapter 20 Hardware Targets for complete target information including supported devices and com mands For proper operation the encoder must be properly connected to the hardware target through all necessary interface circuitry The SSI functionality must be installed in the project settings generally only required if the target is a PLC on a Chip Integrated Circuit or Module Installing the SSI Feature To be able to use the SSI in an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project the SSI must first be installed factory installed on some targets while PLC on a Chip Integrated Circuits and Modules require installa tion As the PLC on a Chip is a commonly used target it will be used as an example to install and config ure the SSI support The SSI is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project oettings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the properties button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and featur
243. nsmitted If width is prefixed with O leading zeros are added until the minimum width is reached If O and are used together the 0 is ignored If O is specified in an integer format the the number of characters that will be printed total Flag Description Left align the variable within the specified width Default is align right 0 0 is ignored width This flag is optional Width is precision when using REAL variables Variable Formats Variables are formatted based on the variable type format Jod Signed Integer Unsigned Integer Lower Case Hexadecimal 900 Other Special Characters and Formats To Print Use Boolean 1 Examples Format Result OIL d OIL 25 LS1 T LS1 TRUE TEMP 6 2f TEMP 234 12 This flag is optional The precision is the number of digits after the decimal point The following are supported variable types and their X Upper Case Hexadecimal of Real or Float Variable binary To Print Use OFF ON FALSE TRUE jo T Format Result OIL 04d OIL 0025 LS1 960 LST OFF TEMP 3 f TEMP 234 Escape Sequences located on next page Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 282 Chapter 22 Function Reference Special Printing Codes Escape Sequences Escape Sequence b f n r t looo xhhhh Represents Bell Alert Backspace Form Feed New Line Carriage Retur
244. nstalling due to a hardware failure or moving computers Contact Divelbiss Customer Support to allow additional activations Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 12 CHAPTER 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit This chapter provides detailed information on the basics of navigating and using the EZ LADDER Toolkits workspace menus tool bars and windows Chapter Contents EZ LADDER Toolkit Overview enn 14 EZ LADDER Toolkit Menus eren nmm 15 FILE MENU ee eee eee ee 15 EDI MENU 16 VIEW MENU 17 PROJECT Um 17 REPORTS MENU nnns 18 WINDOW 2 CEU ennnen 18 HELP MENU 8 19 EZ LADDER Toolkit Tool Bars and Tool Bar 19 Ladder Diagram 21 Cross Reference Window Pane eere enne nen nnn 22 Output Window unciis nee bise dieu 23 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit EZ LADDER Toolkit Overview
245. o increase efficiency when programming ladder diagram projects As discussed earlier many of these tool bars may be either viewed or hidden EZ LADDER Toolkit defaults these tool bars as viewable File Edit View Help J lO Edit Inst Ue k gt abel Gare ip C Abe i il CTU CID IP TOM TOF Insert Function Figure 2 3 Each tool bar contains multiple buttons The following describes the function of each button 3 New Project Opens a new blank EZ LADDER Toolkit Project Window gg Open Project Browse and open an existing EZ LADDER Toolkit Project 9 Save Project Saves the currently selected EZ LADDER Toolkit Project m Cut Cuts Deletes the selected Items Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 19 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit Copy Copies the currently selected items to the Window s Clipboard Print Project Opens the Print dialog for printing the EZ LADDER Toolkit Project qj Help Opens the Help About dialog Select Tool Selects individual or multiple items Click on item to select or click and drag to k select multiple items Horizontal Link Used to draw horizontal links between functions object and variables Vertical Link Used to draw vertical links between functions object and variables Edit Edit Variables Opens the
246. occasionally targets get corrupted and communications cannot be established using normal methods This can be caused by not erasing a ladder diagram prior to upgrading kernels wrong kernels installed and interruptions during kernel installations The Target Utilities listed here are only available on hardware targets that have V1 0 0 5 or later bootloader versions installed The bootloader is installed at the factory and can not be updated outside the factory environment When Unable to Connect to the Target The following steps may be taken if you can verify the connection problems is with the actual hardware tar get unit specifically another unit connects with the same setup and program 1 Start EZ LADDER Toolkit and open any project that uses the target or create a new project with the actual hardware target selected This project must have at least one rung of ladder 3 Verify the Serial Port Settings and connect the target to the computer 4 Enter the Monitor Mode Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 3 Chapter 4 Configuring Targets 5 Press the F11 key on your computer s keyboard The dialog box in Figure 4 6 will open ud EZ Ladder Figure 4 6 6 Disconnect power from the hardware target 7 Click the ENTER BOOTLOADER button in the dialog box A timing dialog box will appear This is amount of time that is remaining to re apply power to the hardware target 8
247. od to locate where a contact or other function is located in the ladder diagram program Figure 2 5 shows Cross Reference Window Cross references are updated zi pum automatically when objects change This window may be used to find objects quickly Double click on any Q of the object rung numbers listed for an object or function and EZ LADDER Toolkit will locate and display that section of the ladder diagram The Cross Reference Window may be viewed or hidden by using the Tu View Cross References Menu Labels Figure 2 5 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 22 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit Output Window Pane EZ LADDER Toolkit provides an Output Window pane where error messages are displayed Typically error messages are only updated and displayed during a Verify operation or Compile operation Figure 2 6 dis plays an example error identified during a compile process left link at 8 1 the first number in the location refers to the column in the workspace while the Q When an error message identifies a location i e ERROR Object Motor at 9 1 doesn t have a second number refers to the actual rung number where the error occurs Column Rung Starting verify LINK ERROR Vertical or Object link not found at 1 1 ERROR Object Motor at 9 1 doesn t have a left link at 8 1 Errors found 10 1 Figure
248. ode is invalid or corrupt Re compile the ladder diagram project to correct this issue x is not supported by the current target Editor Mode The object or function block that you are trying to use and place is not supported on target selected in the Project Settings This can be caused if the hardware target is changes after a ladder diagram is created then function blocks are edited Either change the target or delete this function block object Ladder program is not present Monitor Mode No ladder diagram program was detected on the connected hardware target Link at x y had an invalid Grid point Editor Mode The link is open or not connected at a grid point Correct or re draw the link Link is not valid Editor Mode The link you are trying to create is not valid This is typically caused when trying to link one type of vari able integer real etc to a function block or object that does not support that type or all variables linked to the function block must be identical types and you are trying to link a variable that does not match the types already connected to the function block No acknowledgement sent from target x Monitor Mode The target did not send a no acknowledgement during communications with EZ LADDER Toolkit This error can occur occasionally based on many factors Click ok to clear Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 148 Chapter 18 Troubleshooting Object already there
249. of the function block input PD DTR as the actual count Reset CNTR Configures the device s Index input to act as a reset counter This will reset the actual counter to zero Load OTR Configures the devices Index input to transfer the actual count into the OTR register The OTR register is a temporary register for storing the count Asynchronous Index Asynchronous index mode Valid in all modes Synchronous Index oynchronous index mode Only valid in quadrature mode Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 135 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support Clock Filter Divide by 1 The clock input to the device is divided by 1 to create a filter frequency This filter frequency must be at least 4 times larger than the frequency on the device A input Divide by 2 The clock input to the device is divided by 2 to create a filter frequency This filter frequency must be at least 4 times larger than the frequency on the device A input LFLAG DFLAG Flag on IDX This check box enable the index flag bit that is output on the status register ST of the CNTR_LS7366R function block Flag on CMP This check box enable the compare flag bit that is output on the status register set if DTR actual count Flag on BW This check box enable the borrow flag bit that is output on the status register set if counter wraps negative borrow Flag on CY This check box enable the borrow flag bit that is output on the sta
250. oil LATCH coil and UNLATCH coil are the only objects that must be placed in a particular location They must be located in the last column next to the right power rail Any attempt to place one of them in another location will cause an error dialog box to be displayed A ladder diagram is created using rungs A rung is a horizontal line of logic EZ LADDER Toolkit allows the maximum number of rungs to be configured when the target is selected in the Project Settings dialog Figure 2 4 shows the ladder diagram workspace and rungs of horizontal logic Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 21 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit EZ Ladder Standard EZ Ladder1 2 a 2 _ EZ File Edit View Project Reports Window Help teat 9 E JMP Edit Inst k Vas MON 4 4 CTD CTUD TON TOF Insert Function Stat ELEMENTS on RUNG 1 Motor mu Z Coils H Contacts Functions Variables 4 ELEMENTS on RUNG 2 Labels L 3 gt Rung Numbers X m Figure 2 4 Cross Reference Window Pane EZ LADDER Toolkit provides a real edit time Cross Reference Window This window provides lists of contacts coils variables and functions as well as their location by rung This quick reference provides an easy meth
251. oints are optional based on the requirements of the controller program and network configuration Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 105 Chapter 14 1 Send Heartbeat 2 191 Node Status 3 CAN Tx Errors 4 CAN Rx Errors OptiCAN Networking Check this box configure this controller to send a network heartbeat signal message for the network to function properly Although it is possible to have multiple controllers on one network sending heartbeats it is recommended only one controller broadcast a heartbeat per network One node on the OptiCAN network MUST broadcast the heartbeat This setting identifies when to broadcast the status of this controller node The broadcast trigger may be selected by clicking in the table The selections are Specified Interval Change of State and Specified Interval and Change of otate This setting identifies when to broadcast the CAN Transmit errors identified by this controller node The broadcast trigger may be selected by clicking in the table The selections are Specified Interval Change of State and Specified Interval and Change of State This setting identifies when to broadcast the CAN Receive errors identified by this controller node The broadcast trigger may be selected by clicking in the table The selections are Specified Interval Change of State and Specified Interval and Change of State Controller OptiCAN Network Register Assignments The
252. oj X Jo po ooo Example Circuit CHR sl CLADISP Related Functions SI DISP Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 288 Chapter 22 Function Reference SI DISP 51 DISP Description The SI DISP function writes integer or real values to the Solves lIt s 4 digit display When enabled the value of the variable connected to the input will be displayed When plac ing the SI DISP function a new dialog box will open To display a real variable click the check box for Display Real Values and set the number of digits after the decimal point The Display Leading Zeros check box will cause leading zeros to be displayed automati cally if the value is smaller than 4 digits Input Output Connections The SI DISP function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN and one output Q worm type integer Rest Boolean Timer ActiveState Other Detais Em ma X Cater LoT pom x x j J jJ qo o ow gx j X l Example Circuit CHI Sl DISP Related Functions SI CLRDISP Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 289 Chapter 22 Function Reference SR SR Description The SR function acts as a set dominant bistable If the set input S is true the output Q is true Atrue on the reset R input sets the output Q to false only if the set S input is also false Input Output Connections The
253. olkit User Manual 90 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Unlike a standard windows application objects on the clipboard cannot be pasted using cTRL v or by using the Edit Menu s Paste feature To paste an object or multiple objects in EZ LADDER Toolkit use the Select Tool from the tool bar and hover the point at the location to paste if pasting multiple objects this would be the top left of the objects that will be pasted Right click and choose Paste The objects will be pasted When pasting objects or rungs there must be enough room to paste the copied section horizontally and vertically or an error will occur When pasting rungs move the pointer near the left power rail as an pasting point Inserting and Deleting Rungs During development of a ladder diagram project it often becomes necessary to insert new rungs between existing rungs or to delete rungs that will not be required Inserting Rungs To insert a new rung in EZ LADDER Toolkit position the pointer where the insertion needs to occur typically near the left power rail Right click and choose Insert Rung A rung will insert at this location All later rungs will be moved accordingly and all cross references will update with the new rung numbers Deleting Rungs To delete a rung position the pointer on the rung to be deleted Right click and choose Delete Rung The selected rung will be deleted Only empty rungs may be deleted Saving EZ LADDER Toolkit Pro
254. ommunications Retentive Variables Modbus Slave OptiCAN Networking Keypad Support EEPROM Storage Low Power Mode LCD Display Support ADS7841 A D SPI Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Grey Scale Encoder GC SSI Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Counter Quadrature CNTR LS7366R Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Keypad KEYPAD Latching Coil LATCH LCD Clear LCD CLEAR LCD Print LCD PRINT Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME
255. on The enable EN must be true for the LESS THAN function to be enabled P1 Input Output Connections The LESS THAN function block placement requires connections of at least 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and one output pin Q The EN is always considered an input in the total P number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used worm Type Integer Rea Boolean Timer Active State Other Dotais E ma TT X A amp wme o o Lom oma X OX C owe LLL Example Circuit d Related Functions lt gt gt lt gt Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 257 Chapter 22 Function Reference LESS THAN LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt EQUAL TO Description The LESS THAN or EQUAL TO provides an if less than or equal to comparison for the Px inputs The number of inputs is specified when the object is placed The output Q is true if P1 is less than or equal to P2 and P2 is less than or equal to and so on The enable EN must be true for the LESS THAN or EQUAL TO function to be enabled Input Output Connections The LESS THAN or EQUAL TO function block placement requires connections of at least 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and one output pin Q The EN is always considered an input in the total number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used wo
256. on block placement requires connections of five input pins CU CD R LD PV and three output pins QU QD CV Active State Other Details Rising Edge Rising Edge Reset is dominant True when CV PV True when CV 0 Example Circuit CR3 CHA CUSetpt Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 226 Chapter 22 Function Reference Timing Diagram QU E LII T nau i T co E 4 5 NEN Related Functions CTU Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 227 Chapter 22 Function Reference DIRECT COIL DIRECT COIL Description T The DIRECT COIL is a representation of an internal boolean variable output coil or an actual hardware real world output Its normal state is false or normally de energized An internal DIRECT COIL may also be referred to as a control relay CR If there is power flow to the DIRECT COIL then it will be true on If there is no power flow to the DIRECT COIL then it will be false off The DIRECT COIL may only be placed in the last column Example Circuit CHI COIL Related Functions INVERTED COIL DIRECT CONTACT INVERTED CONTACT Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 220 Chapter 22 Function Reference DIRECT CONTACT DIRECT CONTACT Description The DIRECT CONTACT is a representation of an internal boolean variable input or an actual hardware re
257. on the OptiCAN network In addition to controllers other de vices support OptiCAN including I O modules As these devices are not programmed with an EZ LADDER Toolkit ladder diagram project other means must be used to identify and configure them There are two tools that may be used to configure non controller OptiCAN devices The first option is to purchase the OptiCAN Configuration Tool Professional The Professional version is sold separately and requires additional hardware included in the purchase The Professional version does not have a limitation on the number of nodes that may configured In addition it also has more advanced controls diagnostics and reporting features The OptiCAN Configuration Tool Professional has it s own User s Manual If the OptiCAN network will host more than 10 non controller nodes then you must purchase and use the OptiCAN Configuration Tool Professional to configure the non controller nodes The OptiCAN Configuration Tool Basic is part of the EZ LADDER Toolkit and is capable of configuring up to 10 total non controller nodes on an OptiCAN network As this is a feature of the EZ LADDER Toolkit and does not require additional hardware or software it will covered in detail The can detect up to 10 nodes returning the Node ID Device Type Name and it s Serial Number To use the OptiCAN Configuration Tool a ladder diagram project with OptiCAN enabled must be loaded compiled and running on a target Using
258. onal variables will be boolean output variables representing a boolean or 1 for the actual bit In Figure 5 10 the Add Variable dialog box shows the creation of one of the actual bit controlling boolean variables These bit controlling variables are always set as Output and the Var I O Number is the variable name of the bit addressable variable and the bit number to control separated by a period In Figure 5 10 the bit addressable variable is named Limit and the bit shown being controlled is 3 or the placeholder for the number 8 in integer form and the variable that is controlling the bit is named Bit3 Therefore if Bit3 is true then bit 3 of the variable Limit would be true changing the value of the variable Limit by its placeholder value in this case 8 Bit Controlling Output Variable Boolean Name Name tt _ Description This controls bt Lt Se postion Name of the Bit Addressable m variable and bit number to be Var Number controlled Format is Output Default Value C internal Name BitNumber Retentive Variable Type Output Cancel Figure 5 10 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 53 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Reading the bit of a Variable To read the bit of an integer variable identify or create the variable In addition to the variable that will be bit addressable the one you just identifi
259. operational data such as torque engine speed and more EZ LADDER Toolkit provides the ability for ladder diagrams to interface to J1939 CAN networks and to moni tor common J1939 broadcast parameters J1939 support is based on actual hardware target specifications PLC on a Chip Integrated J Circuits and Modules support J1939 communications as well as do some standard Divelbiss PLCs and Controllers For PLCs and controllers refer to the supported features See Chapter 20 Hardware Targets Configuring J1939 Communications As with most features J1939 Communications must be installed and configured in the EZ LADDER Toolkit before it may be used Divelbiss standard controllers based on PLC on a Chip Enhanced Baby Bear PCS XXX etc are configured based on the part number For details on specific targets please see Chapter 20 Hardware Targets J1939 Communications is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the properties button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find J1939 Figure 12 1 shows the Device Properties window
260. ost variables these attributes are common While some attributes are optional such as description others are required prior to creating the variable When creating a new variable it is ideal to set it s attributes with as much detail as possible Integer Real and Boolean Variable Attributes When adding new integer real or boolean variables refer to Figure 5 5 for the Add Variable dialog box The following are fields attributes for variables Some must be completed while others are optional 1 Name The variable name is entered in this field This name will be used to identify this variable and will be the name viewed in the workspace and any cross reference and reports All names must begin with a letter and cannot contain any spaces A unique name is require for each variable Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 45 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects 2 Description 3 Variable Type 4 Var Number 5 Default Value This is where a text based description may be entered for more clarification and details regarding this variable Descriptions appear in reports and in many dialog boxes This attribute is optional The variable type is selected in this box The choices are Input Select Input if the variable will actually represent a real world digital input on the target Selecting this option will require that physical address of the input to be entered in the Var Number
261. otes Notes can be added to the list of nodes to help with documentation and service later This is accessed from the OptiCAN Configuration Tool To access this feature in the Divelbiss OptiCAN Configuration Tool window use the Reports Menu and select Node List The Node List Report window will open Place the cursor under the Note Heading next to the node of choice Simply type in the notes for that node See Figure 14 20 The node list and notes may be saved and printed for future reference Mode List Report ID Serial Number Type Mates 4 07240004 1000 Harsh Environment Controller This is where can type a note for 07240006 HEC 1100 Harsh Environment Digital lO This is where can type nate for Cancel o ave Print Figure 14 20 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 117 CHAPTER 15 SPI Devices and Support This chapter provides basic information to understand how to install configure and use the SPI Devices and SPI features in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents lx SAVE SUD DOM T 119 Configuring SPI Slave 119 Using the SPI Slave eren nnn 121 Timing Diagrams amp Waveforms nennen 123 Y 125 ADS7844 12 Bit Analog to Digital
262. ower Mode Installation Configuration 205 Entering Low Power 207 Waking from Low Power Mode 207 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 204 Chapter 21 Low Power Mode Low Power Mode Overview A low power consumption mode is a mode of operation where the least amount of power consumption is used This is ideal for mobile and battery powered applications to reduce power between times of use Es sentially in this mode the controller or processor is asleep While asleep the controller will not function or process any I O or serial data The controller or processor can then be awakened by a pre assigned digital input All I O states are maintained when entering low power mode The low power mode must be supported by the EZ LADDER hardware target Low Power Mode Installation Configuration To gain functionality of the Low Power Mode this function must be installed enabled in the EZ LAD DER Toolkit project in the Project Settings Menu For this example we will use the PLC on a Chip target PLCHIP M2 25600 The Low Power Mode is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the properties button
263. poration M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 188 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC HMI C210X E R Features OptiCAN Networking Serial Printing 2 Counter Inputs Retentive Variables 2x16 Large Font Display 4 PWM Outputs EEPROM Storage Programmable Buttons LEDS 2 10 bit Analog Inputs J1939 Communications Programmable Beeper Current Feedback for PWM Outputs 5232 422 485 Serial Port Display Heater 2 Relay Outputs Modbus Slave 6 Digital Inputs Optional Expansion Features Up to 4 PWM Capable Outputs 12 bit DAC Outputs Quadrature Counter Type K Thermocouple Inputs 10 bit Analog Input 5V 10V 20mA Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Moving Average MAVG Less Than Equal To lt Maximum MAX Not Equal To lt gt Minimum MIN Equal To Modulo MOD EEPROM Read EEPROM READ Multiplication MULT EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS Greater Than gt OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Greater Than Equal To gt Bitwise NOT NOT Absolute Value ABS Bitwise OR OR Addition ADD Print to LCD LCD PRINT Bitwise AND AND Pulse With Modulation PWM Average AVG PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Bit Pack BIT PACK Quadrature Counter CNTR LS7366R Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Convert to Real REAL Compare CMP Rotate Left ROL Clear LCD LCD CLEAR Rotate Right ROR Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Reset
264. port This chapter provides basic information to understand how to install configure and use the Serial Printing feature in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents Serial Print PURCION ANY 85 Configuring the Serial Print Feature esee 85 Printing Data to a Serial Device using a Serial Port 87 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 11 Serial Printing Support Serial Print Functionality EZ LADDER Toolkit provides the ability to serially print text and variables to other devices using a serial port This feature can be useful to send data to data loggers displays and other devices The serial print feature utilizes a standard RS232 serial port that may be configured and can operate with multiple baud rates Serial Printing support is based on actual hardware target specifications PLC on a Chip Integrated Circuits and Modules support Serial Printing functionality as well as do some standard Divelbiss PLCs and Controllers For PLCs and controllers refer to the supported features See Chapter 20 Hardware Targets M Series PLC on a Chip targets support RS232 Serial Printing only RS485 and 5422 are not supported Configuring the Serial Print Feature As with most features the Serial Print feature must be installed and configured in the EZ LADDER Toolkit before it may be used Divelbiss standard
265. port A report window will open displaying the generated report See Figure 17 3 Print Page and View Controls uL Print Preview amp j EP UD G9 Change Page to View Control Cross References Dai 9 10 2006 905 AM Variable Report Figure 17 3 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 145 CHAPTER 18 Troubleshooting This chapter provides basic information to understand how to solve problems and to iden tify problems and common error message found using the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents Emor 147 Common Ladder Diagram 150 Connecting Functions to Functions Errors 150 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 146 Chapter 18 Troubleshooting Error Messages The following is a list of error messages that may be encountered when using the EZ LADDER Toolkit While you may experience any of these messages many are rarely encountered different program is running Monitor Mode When connecting to a target the program running on the target is different than the program currently opened in EZ LADDER Toolkit Could not connect to target Monitor Mode EZ LADDER Toolkit was not able to connect to a hardware target Could not get target version Please connect first Monitor Mode EZ LADDER Toolkit was unable to ret
266. ps The order of steps may also be changed a Drum Sequencer Properties Name DRUM_SEQ1 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 231 Chapter 22 Function Reference Example Circuit JRUM_ 5 1 1UM SEO 1UM _ Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 232 Chapter 22 Function Reference EQUAL TO EQUAL TO Description EN Q The EQUAL TO function provides an equal to comparison for the Px inputs The number of inputs is specified when the object is placed The Q output is true if all the Px inputs are equal The Enable must be true for the EQUAL TO function to be enabled Input Output Connections Pl The EQUAL TO function block placement requires connections of at least three input pins EN P1 P2 and one output pin Q The EN is always considered an input in the total number of inputs therefore always add one to the number of Px inputs that need to be used P worm type Integer Rea Boolean Timer Active State Other Detais mu X o om X x _ _ _Namberofinputsis drame _ om x 1L onu Example Circuit Related Functions lt gt lt gt lt gt Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 233 Chapter 22 Function Reference EEPROM READ EEPROM READ Description EN The EEPROM READ recalls variables stored in non volatile memory EEPROM
267. psed time ET All contacts and coils are actually variables themselves and as they are created they must be either assigned to an existing variable or a new variable created must be created declared for them Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 42 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Creating and Placing Variables Placing and creating variables can be done several ways Inserting some objects automatically require the selection or creation of a new variable when being inserted forces a dialog box while function blocks typi cally require you to insert any needed variables and link them without being prompted to do so We will identify how to create and assign variables using two methods although variable creation is basi cally the same for all methods Placing Contacts and Coil Type Objects To place a contact from the tool bar select the Direct Contact and locate a point in the workspace to place the item Clicking that location will place the object When placing certain objects coils and contacts a Contact Properties dialog box will appear You can choose a variable that already exists from the drop down list or type in a new name For this example we will type in a new name and click If you had selected a name that already exists the object placement would be completed Since we have chosen a new variable the dialog in Figure 5 3 will appear EZ LADDER i a Variable doesn
268. ptiCAN Device 1 AT EACH TERMINATING END OF CABLE CABLE MIDPOINT GROUND SHIELD j EGND EGND OptiCAN OptiCAN Device2 Device 3 OptiCAN Device 4 102 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking OptiCAN Specifications Bandwidth 250 KBits Sec Maximum Cable Length Up to 270 Meters Maximum Number of Nodes Up to 254 Nodes Registers per Node 256 Registers Dependent on cable selection and bus loading See Application Note for CAN Transceiver NXP 0020 or your CAN transceiver Using Controllers on the OptiCAN Network A typical application involves a controller running it s own ladder diagram project monitoring inputs and controlling outputs based upon the project that is running When connected to an OptiCAN network the con troller will operate the same but now using OptiCAN it can communicate to other devices including other controllers with OptiCAN and OptiCAN I O Modules The following describes how a controller can operate when used on a active OptiCAN network 1 Local Control Monitor Inputs and Control Outputs 2 Globally broadcast data to all OptiCAN Nodes on the OptiCAN Network 3 Listen for Broadcasts from a specific Node on the OptiCAN Network All EZ LADDER Toolkit programmed OptiCAN network controllers are configured using the EZ LADDER Toolkit and maintain their network settings parameters and register settings in the actual ladder diagram project Ea
269. put Output Example Circuit CR Related Functions SHR ON L9 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 286 Chapter 22 Function Reference SHR Description The SHR function provides a right bit shift of the P1 input The P2 input specifies the number of one bit right shifts If the enable EN is false the function is disabled If the en able EN is true the output O will be equal result of the right shifted input in integer form 32 16 8 4 2 1 A shift right when the output is 1 will cause the output to be zero bit is shifted off Zeros are always shifted on to the left side when a right shift occurs Input Output Connections The SHR function block placement requires connections of 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O EN Output Output Example Circuit CHR Related Functions SHL ON L9 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 287 Chapter 22 Function Reference SI CLRDISP S CLRDISP 2 EN Q Description The SI CLRDISP function erases what is currently displayed on the Solves It s 4 digit display The SI CLRDISP is dominant over the SI DISP Input Output Connections The SI CLRDISP function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and one output pin Q worm type integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Other Details wma X Cater
270. puts EEPROM Storage Programmable Buttons LEDS 2 10 bit Analog Inputs J1939 Communications Programmable Beeper Current Feedback for PWM Outputs RS232 422 485 Serial Port Display Heater 2 Relay Outputs Modbus Slave 6 Digital Inputs Optional Expansion Features Up to 4 PWM Capable Outputs 12 bit DAC Outputs Quadrature Counter Type K Thermocouple Inputs 10 bit Analog Input 5V 10V 20mA Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Moving Average MAVG Less Than Equal To lt Maximum MAX Not Equal To lt gt Minimum MIN Equal To Modulo MOD EEPROM Read EEPROM READ Multiplication MULT EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS Greater Than gt OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Greater Than Equal To gt Bitwise NOT NOT Absolute Value ABS Bitwise OR OR Addition ADD Print to LCD LCD PRINT Bitwise AND AND Pulse With Modulation PWM Average AVG PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Bit Pack BIT PACK Quadrature Counter CNTR LS7366R Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Convert to Real REAL Compare CMP Rotate Left ROL Clear LCD LCD CLEAR Rotate Right ROR Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Count Down CTD Select SEL Count Up CTU Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Count Up Down CTUD Shift Left SHL Division DIV Shift Right SHR Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Set Reset Set Dom
271. r diagram is then compiled converted into machine language code for down loading to the hardware target To compile a ladder diagram project on the tool bar click the Compile button All EZ LADDER Toolkit Projects must be compiled prior to downloading them to a hardware target Once a program has been compiled it does not need to be compiled again unless the actual ladder diagram project has changed since it was last compiled Any errors encountered during the compilation process must be corrected before the compilation will suc cessfully complete and provide operational compiled code See Chapter 18 Troubleshooting for common error messages Figure 5 9 illustrates two Output Window messages for the same ladder diagram project The first identifies errors during the compile process while the second illustrates a successful compile EZ EZ Ladder Standard Ladder Diagram Project Name did EET EZ File rts Window Help alx x a wm me Starting verify EAS CO ee LINK ERROR Vertical link not found at 5 2 1 Errors found t amp Coils Labels 1 Errors found Starting compile HAM bytes used 66 RAM bytes left 4030 HOM bytes used 215 ROM bytes left 65321 Retentive EEPROM bytes used 0 bytes left 100 End compile Figure 5 9 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 52 Chapter 5
272. r each function block Note number of bits offset bits must be less than or equal to 32 Input Output Connections The BIT PACK function block placement requires connections of a minimum of two input pins EN BO and two output pins Q O The number of bits is specified when the function is inserted The EN is not considered a bit to pack and is not included in the number of bits to pack when placing the function block Pin Type B2 Real Boolean Active State Other Details integer Cm ow X Cates Example Circuit CRI PACK C H3 Related Functions BIT UNPACK Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 216 Chapter 22 Function Reference BIT UNPACK BIT UNPACK Description EN The BIT UNPACK is a configurable function that will convert a 32 bit integer into up to 32 individual boolean outputs bits The input is the 32 bit integer input the EN enables the function when true The Q output is true when the function is enabled The Bx outputs are the result of the integer being converted to bit outputs binary equivalent The number of bits must be identified when the function is placed in the ladder diagram 1 32 bits Only boolean variables may be used as bit outputs Included in the configuration is the bit offset The bit offset allows the programmer to use multiple BIT UNPACK functions and have a single 32 bit input integer by offsetting the bit
273. r of binary rotations shifts to occur to P1 The actual bit only rotates when the minimum number is reached example 32 bit oO rotation to the input number 32 The enable EN must be true for the ROR function to be enabled The Q output is true when the ROR function is enabled The O Output is the rotated number represented in integer form P Input Output Connections The ROR function block placement requires connections of 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and two output pins Q O VoPim Integer Real Boolean Timer ActiveState OtherDetalls om mae x Activote Po mu ox f m Lo owt x nj j j Pm owe jJ X Jo Example Circuit Related Functions ROL Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 2 8 Chapter 22 Function Reference RS RS Description The RS function acts as a reset dominant bistable If the set input S is true the output is true A true on the reset input sets the output Q to false regardless of the set S input state Input Output Connections The RS function block placement requires connections of two input pins S R and one output pin Q Type Integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Other Dotais mw LLL LS ma J ow x j J n Example Circuit CRI
274. ral state and local laws and regulations applicable to the use or disposition of the Licensed Software including without limitation all export laws and regulations Licensee shall be solely liable for all Resulting Products any and all warranties on Resulting Products shall be made only by and on behalf of Licensee and Licensee shall make NO representations or warranties on behalf of Divelbiss For the term of this Agreement and any renewal thereof and for one 1 year thereafter Licensee will not solicit or hire any of Divelbiss s employees T Limitation of Liability LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT NEITHER DIVELBISS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS EMPLOYEES OR AFFILIATES WILL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR GOODWILL LOSS OF DATA OR USE OF DATA INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS NOR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND UNDER ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT SPECIFICALLY INCLUDING ANY LOSS TO OR DAMAGES OF LICENSEE S CUSTOMERS OF ANY SORT WHATSOEVER HOWEVER CAUSED WHETHER ANY SUCH CLAIM SOUNDS IN CONTRACT TORT STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY EVEN IF DIVELBISS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS IN NO EVENT WILL DIVELBISS S LIABILITY UNDER ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT RECEIVED BY DIVELBISS FROM LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT DURING THE NINETY 90 DAY PERIOD PRECEDING
275. range for each function block Note the number of bits offset bits must be less than or equal to 32 Input Output Connections The UNPACK function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN 1 and a minimum of two output pins Q Bx The number of bits is specified when the func tion is inserted The EN is not considered a bit to unpack and is not included in the number of bits to unpack when placing the function block Type Integer Rea Boolean Timer Active State Omerbetals om OX d ow X o5 out _ Although the output type for the Bx bit outputs is boolean boolean variables must be connected to the Bx outputs It is not allowed to connect coils B2 Example Circuit CRI IT UNPACK EN Q Numi f BO Bi B2 Related Functions BIT_PACK Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 217 Chapter 22 Function Reference BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description The BOOLEAN function converts the input P into a boolean zero or non zero output O The enable EN must be true for the BOOLEAN function to be enabled The Q output is true when the BOOLEAN function is enabled Input Output Connections The BOOLEAN function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN P and two output pins Q O worm type integer Rest Boolean Timer ActiveState Other Dera
276. re a value is stored the data read will be corrupted Variable 1 Address Boolean 2 Variable 2 Address Integer 4 Variable 3 Address Boolean 2 bytes uses location 0 and 1 bytes uses location 2 3 4 and 5 bytes uses location 6 and 7 N EEPROMADDRESSLOCATON Verable amp Type Sion 2 5 6 7 Variable 1 Boolean 4 Variable 2 Integer mm Varases oen NN Refer to Chapter 22 Function Reference for details on using the EEPROM READ and EEPROM WRITE function blocks Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 67 CHAPTER 8 Pulse Width Modulation This chapter provides basic information to understand what Pulse Width Modulation is and how it is used as feature in the EZ LADDER Toolkit and hardware target Chapter Contents What is Pulse Width Modulation esssess 69 PWM Output Basics c c 69 Configuring PWM in Project Settings 70 Controlling PWM in the Ladder Diagram Project 71 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 68 Chapter 8 Pulse Width Modulation What is Pulse Width Modulation Pulse Width Modulation also referred to as PWM is a term common to the industrial controls and electronics industries Essentially PWM is generally an output
277. re information is required Current Count Integer Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 223 Chapter 22 Function Reference CTD CTD Description Q The CTD function is programmable software down counter A true on CD will cause the counter to decrement by one Once the counter CV equals zero the Q output will be true A true on LD will cause the counter to load the PV as the current CV count and reset the Q output The down counter triggers on a false to true transition on the CD input LD Input Output Connections The CTD function block placement requires connections of three input pins CD LD PV and two output pins Q CV CV Integer Rea Boolean Timer ActiveState OtherDetalls CD Input X Rising Edge cb mu X JhengEde PO O me X o f LO om X d 9w X l1 Lo ow owe X 1 Example Circuit Timing Diagram Related Functions CTU CTUD Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 224 Chapter 22 Function Reference CTU CTU Description The CTU function is a programmable software up counter A true on CU will cause the coun ter to increment by one Once the counter CV equals the preset value PV the Q output will be true A true on reset R will cause the counter reset to zero and reset the Q output Th
278. res and configurations Failure to review the data sheet may result a loss of understanding of how to configure and use this device Q As a difference between the LS7366R counter and other SPI devices the LS7366R does not use variables but instead relies on a function block to provide access to counter functionality in the ladder diagram project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 133 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support uH 1573668 Device Properties SPI Part SPIO CS Output r Quadrature Mode C Non quadrature A CLK B DIR C Xi ie x ws Count mode Free running C Single cycle Range limit Modulo n Clock Filter Disable index Asynchronous Index Divby1 C Load CNTR amp Synchronous Index Diy by 2 Reset CNTR Load OTR LFLAG DFLAG Flag on IDX Flag on CMP Flag on Bw Flagon CY Figure 15 17 LS7366R Configuration Parameters All modes are controlled by the hardware settings listed Functionality is achieved using a function block in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Quadrature Mode Count Mode Non Quadrature A CLK B DIR A pulse on the A input will increment the counter or decrement the counter based on the B input X1 TheA and B inputs are used in X1 mode for use with biphase encoders The count value changes once for each biphas
279. res connections of at least one input pin EN and two output pins Q ER Additional inputs are based on variables in printing text ype Integer Rea Bootean Timer Active State Omerbetals Tx po Em Ow X __Settononzeroifenor __ Cw oma X OX ef ow fi x completed Example Circuit CHI LCD PRINTI Text Message Formatting The LCD PRINT function text formatted per ANSI C printf Variables as well as text may be printed These variables must be formatted correctly As variables are added to the text the function block will auto matically add the appropriate input for the variables Text Text is entered exactly as the message is intended Printing text longer than the display will support will result in truncated printing It is ideal to structure printing based on column and row and to verify length of the printing Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 255 Chapter 22 Function Reference Variables Variables are placed in the text using flags and print specification fields The following is the configuration for adding variables to the text flag width precision identifies the beginning of a variable or other type of text entry Example Text OIL PSI 3d flag This flag is optional Use the following flags to change the way data is transmitted Flag Description
280. rieve the target version when using the target information feature or button Could not open COMX Monitor Mode When connecting to a target the selected Com Port does not exist or is in use This is typically caused when another application is using and locked the serial port as a resource Close the other application to correct this Error downloading file Monitor Mode An unknown error occurred while downloading the program to target Try downloading the program again ERROR downloading user program invalid address Monitor Mode An invalid address was detected in a communications packet while EZ LADDER Toolkit was connected to a target ERROR downloading user program invalid record Monitor Mode An invalid record was detected in a communications packet while EZ LADDER Toolkit was connected to a target ERROR downloading user program checksum error Monitor Mode An invalid checksum was detected in a communications packet while EZ LADDER Toolkit was connected to a target ERROR downloading user program record to long Monitor Mode An invalid record length was detected in a communications packet while EZ LADDER Toolkit was connected to a target ERROR putting target into bootloader Monitor Mode An error occurred when EZ LADDER Toolkit was trying to access the target bootloader Verify the serial connections and settings cables and the target Error serial port not open Monitor Mode The serial port that is configured i
281. rm Type Integer Real Timer Active State Other Dotais E ma _ S o o Lo oma fo x LLL Example Circuit Ri lt CR3 EN Q Numi Related Functions lt gt gt lt gt Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 250 Chapter 22 Function Reference LIMIT LIMIT Description EN Q The LIMIT function provides minimum and maximum limited output for the input IN The function compares the input IN If it is greater that the maximum MX then the output O is equal to the maximum MX If itis less than the minimum MN then the output O is equal to the minimum MN If it is in between the maximum and minimum then the output O is equal to the actual input IN The enable EN must be true for the LIMIT function to be enabled Input Output Connections The LIMIT function block placement requires connections of four input pins EN MN IN MX and two output pins Q O IN MX Corn iege Real Boolean Timer Active Sate Omerbeais ow Lx oceme 0 Ww me x x d wf me X x Lo me OX fx ef owe x if of owe X x S Example Circuit MinVal MaxVal Related Functions CMP HYSTER Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 259 Chapter 22 Fun
282. roject can be viewed in real time If the two build numbers differ then the warning dialog box in Figure 6 5 is displayed This dialog serves as a warning that the two build numbers do not match While this is usually caused by the ladder diagram project being compiled again since it was downloaded it also requires that you must download the new build of the ladder diagram project to view it in real time Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 59 Chapter 6 Downloading amp Running Projects EZ LADDER emn ma Version running 0 0 0 0 Build Number 3 Version compiled 0 0 0 0 Build Number 4 Figure 6 5 Connecting for the First Time to a New Target To connect to a target the target must have a kernel installed As hardware targets are shipped from the factory without kernels the kernel must be loaded prior to being able to connect and download projects When trying to connect to a new target for the first time if it is configured correctly and successful the Boot loader Window automatically is displayed From this window the kernel can be selected and installed on the hardware target Figure 6 6 illustrates the Bootloader window Refer to Chapter 4 Configuring Targets for details on installing and upgrading the hardware target kernel Upload File FileName Browse Target PLCHIP M2 2562X Version 1040 Update Target Figure 6 6 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Tool
283. rt These devices can be of the same part or a combination of different types of supported SPI devices Each device must have a unique CS Chip Select assigned to control each device on the SPI bus EZ LADDER Toolkit uses the on board PLC on a Chip SPI ports and general purpose outputs GPOs Only certain GPO pins may be used as the chip select Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 128 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support Select the SPI port from the drop down menu and select the general purpose output pin GPO that will serve as this device s chip select CS With these two devices selected additional channel information will be available to configure See Figure 15 11 The ADS8341 supports up to 4 A D channels Using the provided check box select the actual channels that will be used in the ladder diagram project For each enabled channel a default Variable Name is automati cally created This name may be changed in the variable name box at this time See Figure 15 11 These variable names will be the variables in the ladder diagram that will hold the current analog input values read from the ADS8341 When the program runs the device is automatically queried and the analog input readings are stored in these variables ADS8341 Device Properties SPI Port SPIO CS Output cPo10 Channels Enabled Variable Name AD SPI 0 10 0 CH1 Enabled Variable Name C
284. s E ma X wme Ce oma X x OX J Output J omw Although the output type for the O output is boolean a boolean variable must connected to the O output A coil may be connected but compile errors will result Example Circuit CHI BOOLEAN Related Functions INTEGER REAL TIMER Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 218 Chapter 22 Function Reference CMP CMP Description EN LT The CMP function compares the P1 and P2 inputs LT is true when the P1 input is less than the P2 input EQ is true when the P1 input equals the P2 input GT is true when the P1 input is greater than the P2 input The enable EN must be true for the CMP function to be enabled When the function is disabled all outputs LT GT and EQ are off P1 EQ Input Output Connections The CMP function block placement requires connections of three input pins EN P1 P2 and three output pins LT EQ GT There is output on the CMP function block P GT worm type Integer Rea Boolean Timer Active Stato Other Detais mu Xx me om oma x X Le opos px px p 9w 1 Le oma X Although the output type for the LT EQ and GT outputs is boolean coils must be connected to the them A boolean variable may be conne
285. s different features and function blocks Typically the larger memory models support more features and function blocks For all PLC on a Chip models any feature listed must be individually installed using the Project Settings Menu PLCHIP M2 1280X All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Using certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels Hardware Counter Real Time Clock External HDIO Bus Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Retentive Variables Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Selec
286. sample of a complete OPTICAN TXNETMSG circuit Note the use of contacts to control when the Start Network is sent The Network Start should be sent based on two conditions The network needs to start as in a start up or if communication errors are detected If a single node loses power it will appear as communication loss When node regains power it will not communicate on the network unless another Network Start is sent since nodes do not start on power up If at any time a communication is lost to a node re send the Network Start IHlIGb AM OptiError OptiHestart Figure 14 6 All nodes on the network should begin communication upon receipt of the Start Network command With the network started and communicating it is now possible to broadcast to nodes and listen for node broadcasts Global Broadcasting to all Nodes To broadcast or listen a basic understanding of registers is required Typically controller registers 0 127 are available to be user defined and used while 128 255 are pre defined and cannot be altered The user defined registers are commonly used to communicate between controllers It is recommended that before programming is started that all nodes are identified assigned a node Q ID and documented For each device their register requirements should be identified registers assigned and registers documented This will verify the all requirements are met and help to promote proper functiona
287. ser Manual 193 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PCS 1X1 PCS 1X2 Features Real Time Clock Optional Multipurpose Serial Port Analog Outputs x 2 Retentive Variables Modbus Slave PWM Outputs x 2 EEPROM Storage Serial Printing HDIO Expansion Bus Analog Inputs x 6 Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL_PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB
288. shows the Device Properties window ud Device Properties Figure 10 1 Click Keypad and click ox The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties win dow will now list the Keypad as an installed device Click the Keypad in the device list A PRoPERTIES button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 10 2 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 80 Chapter 10 Keypad Support ud PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X M Figure 10 2 Click the PRoPERTIES button The Keypad Properties dialog box will open In this dialog box select the Keypad port on which the Keypad will be physically connected KEYPAD A KEYPAD B or KEYPAD C Please refer to the schematic of your PLC on a Chip design for the correct port See to Figure 10 3 ad Keypad Properties MEE Keypad on GPOSGPO1S KEYPAD B Keypad on CT S1 RTS1 GPI27 GPO 7 GPO2 43PO30 KEYPAD C Keypad on GPO 18 GPO26 Figure 10 3 Click close the Target s properties and click again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project The keypad matrix can now be utilized from the ladder diagram project Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 81 Chapter 10 Keypad Support Getting Data from the Keypad With the keypad configured in the ladder diagram project it is now possible to use the EZ LADDER Toolkit s function blocks a
289. ss INPUT OUTPUT MACHINE OR PROCESS BEING CONTROLLED PB1 SW1 M 1 Figure 3 1 In place of hard wired relay logic circuitry EZ LADDER Toolkit applications are programmed using relay type symbology This symbology brings ease and familiarity to the programming while adding flexibility Figure 3 2 is the same circuit as shown in Figure 3 1 as it is programmed using the EZ LADDER Toolkit s relay type symbology PHI ow M1 Figure 3 2 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Z9 Chapter 3 Ladder Diagram Basics Basic Ladder Diagram Symbols In ladder diagram all devices are represented by symbols objects and function blocks Chapter 22 Function Reference provides detailed descriptions for all EZ LADDER Toolkit objects and function blocks This section will give a basic information regarding the most commonly used objects Contacts Contacts represent two types of devices The first is real world digital input devices such as limit switches push button switches and proximity sensors The second is that contacts may represent internal relays also named control relays CRs When acting as a real world input the ladder diagram object will rep resent the current state of the real world input it is assigned When used as an internal control relay the contact will represent the current state of the control relay s coil Contacts are represented in the EZ LADDER Toolkit by two differen
290. ss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 206 Chapter 21 Low Power Mode Using the provided drop down menu select the input that will be the wakeup input only those in the list are allowed If retentive variables are to be stored when going into low power mode select the Save Retentive Variables on Sleep checkbox Click close the Low Power Mode Properties click again to close Target s properties and click again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project The low power mode is now functional EZ LADDER Toolkit automatically creates variables for Low Power mode functionality Entering Low Power Mode Entering Low Power mode is actually simple When the Low Power Feature is enabled a boolean variable is automatically created called EnterLowPower This variable is used in the ladder diagram project as a coil or output When the EnterLowPower coils is true the low power mode is triggered Figure 21 5 represents the control of the EnterLowPower coil NoActivity TONI nterLowPowi Figure 21 5 If the assigned Wakeup input is true Low Power Mode is ignored The Wakeup input must be false to enter the Low Power Mode Waking from Low Power Mode When in low power mode a true on the digital input will cause the unit to start operating in normal power consumption mode All logic will operate as normal When the low power mode was enabled installed an
291. sters 5 Write to a Single Coil 6 Write to a Single Register 15 Write to Multiple Coils 16 Write to Multiple Registers For more details regarding master functions and how to use them refer to the network Master s documentation Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 98 CHAPTER 14 OptiCAN Networking This chapter provides basic information to understand how to install configure and use the OptiCAN Networking feature in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents What c 100 Planning the OptiCAN 100 Hardware Requirements amp Recommendations 100 OptiCAN Specifications anna aerea 103 Using Controllers on the OptiCAN Network 103 OptiCAN Controller 103 Configuring a Controller on the OptiCAN Network 104 Controller OptiCAN Network Register Assignments 106 Broadcasting to Other Controllers and Devices 108 Using OptiCAN Configuration Tool 113 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking What is OptiCAN
292. sup ported SPN numbers and descriptions can be found see the J1939 SPN Function block in Chapter 22 Function Reference The J1939 SPN function block is used to read a J1939 CANbus network parameter and then store the value of the parameter in a variable Using the J1939 SPN function block is a two step process When plac ing the function block a new SPN Properties dialog box will open See Figure 12 4 Select the desired SPN number from the drop down menu The description and units of measure will update accordingly a SPN Properties Figure 12 4 When the correct SPN is selected clicking will cause the function block to be placed in the ladder dia gram project Figure 12 5 is a sample of a complete J1939 SPN circuit CRI J1939_SPN RR VAL Figure 12 5 For more detail on all EZ LADDER Toolkit Function Blocks and objects refer to Chapter 22 Q Function Reference Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 92 CHAPTER 13 Modbus Networking This chapter provides basic information to understand how to install configure and use the Modbus Slave Networking feature in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents MOODUS e NOR TQUE 94 Configuring for Modbus Slave cessere 94 Modbus Slave 95 Updating Network and Variable Values
293. t ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Write to Display 51 DISP Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 202 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets Versatile Base Controller Models Each Versatile Base Controller VB XXX model supports different features and function blocks based on the base PLC on a Chip processor and different peripherals on board When the VB XXXX is selected in the Project Settings all the supported features and function blocks are installed automatically The VB Series supports expansion plug in boards Once installed these boards are activated in the Proj ect Settings by selecting the Option board from the drop down menu VB 1000 Features EEPROM Storage 12 Digital Inputs 8 Digital Outputs PWM 2 CAN Ports 1 Programmable LED 1 RS232 Port Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WARITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert
294. t SEL set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 161 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLCHIP M2 2560X All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Using certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels LCD Display Support Real Time Clock D81305 SPI PWM Outputs EEPROM Storage ADS7841 A D SPI Hardware Counter SPI Slave ADS8341 A D SPI HDIO Bus Synchronous Serial Interface SSI DAC7612 D A SPI Retentive Variables Serial Printing LS7366R CNTR SPI Keypad Support Modbus Slave Low Power Mode Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Grey Scale Encoder GC 551 Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Counter Quadrature CNTR LS7366R Di
295. t Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Keypad KEYPAD Latching Coil LATCH LCD Clear LCD CLEAR ADS8341 A D SPI DAC7612 D A SPI J1939 Communications OptiCAN Networking Low Power Mode ADS7841 A D SPI LCD Print ECD PRINT Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNETMSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 164 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLC on a Chip Modules Each PLC on a Chip Module model supports different features and function blocks Typically the larger memory models support more features and function blocks For all PLC on a Chip Module models any feature listed must be individually installed using the Proj
296. t Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 180 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC 400X E R Features OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage 0 20mA Analog Inputs x 4 10 bit 4 PWM Capable Outputs x 4 Output Current Feedback PWM Modbus Slave Hardware Counters 2 Channels J1939 Communications Serial Printing Retentive Variables Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK Bit Unpack UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM_ SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Optional Multipurpose Serial Port Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET
297. t exist Figure 5 3 Click yes to create the new variable The Add Variable dialog box will open automatically with the variable name you entered already in the Name field See Figure 5 4 For now click ox to create the variable We will cover the details of variable attributes later in this chapter You have now successfully created a con tact with a new variable Repeat the same as needed for new contacts or coils Add Variable Description r Variable Type Input Number Output Default Value Internal Figure 5 4 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 43 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects Placing a Linked Variable To place a variable that is linked to a function block from the tool bar select the Insert Variables button Inst Vars In the ladder diagram workspace click in an open area and the Variables window will open This window contains tabs at the top for all variable types supported When inserting a variable next to a function block input only the variable types supported by the function block will be displayed as tabs in the Variables window Select the appropriate type for the variable you are needing to insert and click the App button The Add Vari able dialog box will open automatically Enter a variable name in the Name field See Figure 5 4 For now click to create the variable We will cover the details of v
298. t for the DAC7612 it will be used as an example to install and configure the DAC7612 The DAC7612 is configured using the Project Settings Using the Project Menu choose Settings The Project Settings window will open as previously covered in Chapter 4 Configuring Targets Select the PLC on a Chip target and click the PRoPERTIESs button The target s Properties window will open From the drop down menu DCPN select the PLCHIP M2 25620 Click the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find DAC7612 and SPI port to use either SPIO or SPI1 Figure 15 12 shows the Device Properties window a Device Properties Figure 15 12 Click DAC7612 using the key click the SPI port and click ox The Device Properties window will close and the previous target properties window will now list the DAC7612 and the SPI ports as installed devices Click the DAC7612 in the device list A PRoPERTIES button will appear to the right Refer to Figure 15 13 ud PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X Devices Figure 15 13 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 130 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support The SPI port must be installed individually or no SPI ports will show available in later drop down configuration menus Click the PRoPERTIES button The DAC7612
299. t objects Direct Coil and Negated Con tact Contacts are always shown in their at rest or un powered state Direct Contact E Also known as a normally open contact the direct contact may represent real world inputs or internal relay contacts As a real world input when the input is energized TRUE it will be represented by a TRUE condi tion in the ladder diagram causing power to flow through it to any following objects and function blocks As a real world input when the input is de energized FALSE it will be represented by a FALSE condition in the ladder diagram not allowing power to flow through it to any following objects and function blocks When used as an internal relay the state of the contact TRUE or FALSE depends upon its internal coil state Negated Contact Jj Also known as a normally closed contact the negated contact may represent real world inputs or internal relay contacts As a real world input when the input is energized TRUE it will be represented by a FALSE condition in the ladder diagram not allowing power to flow through it to any following objects and function blocks As a real world input when the input is de energized FALSE it will be represented by a TRUE con dition in the ladder diagram causing power to flow through it to any following objects and function blocks When used as an internal relay the state of the contact TRUE or FALSE depends upon its internal coil state and is always opposit
300. ter 7 Retentive Variables Retentive Variable Limitations While retentive variables and functionality can be a useful tool when creating ladder diagram projects There are limitations to when retentive variable usage As was discussed previously retentive variables are stored in non volatile memory memory that retains data without power and that retentive variable functionality is target dependent The actual target must have non volatile memory capability and the capability to detect a loss of power before power drops below the op erating range for the target In other words the target must be able to sense the loss of power early enough to provide the time needed to write the retentive variables to the non volatile memory while the target s input power is still sufficient for proper operation This functionality is programmed at the factory level and cannot be altered in the ladder diagram project If designing a PLC on a Chip based custom product using the PLC on a Chip Integrated Circuit or Module this functionality is based on the use of the LOW VOLTAGE input Integrated Circuit Pin 56 Module P1 Pin 12 This must be used with a loss of power circuit to detect the loss of power The maximum amount of memory for retentive variables is 100 bytes total During programming you must take into consideration how many variables are retentive and how much memory they use Real and Integer variables require 4 bytes each while boolea
301. th all the available networks and makes assigning registers easier Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 46 Chapter 5 Creating Ladder Diagram Projects ud Add Variable 1 Description 3 3 2 Variable Type er Number 7 4 Output Default Valu 7 5 f Internal 3 Address Registe Ei 6 Figure 5 5 Timer Variable Attributes When adding new timer variables refer to Figure 5 6 for the Add Variable dialog box The following are fields attributes for timer variables Some must be completed while others are optional Typically time durations are entered as the unit of measure closes to the set point Larger times may be entered into fields provided that the total timer value does not exceed 24 days For example 1000 ms may be entered and will be considered 1 second when the program executes However if 750 hours is entered the time is greater than 24 days and the timer will malfunction 1 Name The variable name is entered in this field This name will be used to identify this variable and will be the name viewed in the workspace and any cross reference and reports All names must begin with a letter and cannot contain any spaces A unique name is require for each variable 2 Description This is where a text based description may be entered for more clarification and details regarding this variable Descriptions appear in reports and in many dialog box
302. the contact by name type and it s current state or value EZ EZ Ladder Standard AnotherProgram did EZ File Edit View Project Reports Window Help 15 P cor 0942 E Status Running Program Name AnotherProgram Program Version 0 0 0 0 Build Number 5 Scan Time ms 0 10 CRI CR4 2 mit E Coils 1 g Contacts Functions Variables CR2 DIV CR3 Labels NORM OPEN CONTACT INTERNAL Value 0 Bit3 VarOut RBit3 Figure 6 8 Changing Variable Values EZ LADDER Toolkit provides an option for changing the value of a variable while the ladder project is ex ecuting Double click on the object and an dialog box appears with the current state or variable value This box is changeable and the value may be changed Change the value as needed and click The changes take place immediately The change does not affect the actual ladder diagram in the Edit mode only the executing program This is helpful for adjusting timer and counter values in real time during debugging Changing a contact variable boolean does not always have the desired effect For example If the value of an internal coil that is connected to a real world input is changed using the dialog box the actual value will change only until the next scan and then will revert to its real world status Since all status is re evaluated each scan the contacts
303. the App button The Device Prop erties window will open All the available devices and features for the target are shown in the Devices section Scroll down and find Analog Block O Figure 19 1 shows the Device Properties window a Device Properties 12 Bit 4 Channel A D Converter 16 Bit 4 Channel A D Converter Analog Block 0 ANO AN7 Figure 19 1 Click Analog Block 0 and click ox The Device Properties window will close and the previous target proper ties window will now list the Analog Block 0 as an installed device Refer to Figure 9 2 ud PLC ON A CHIP DCPN PLCHIP M2 2562X M Devices Device Name Descriptic Analog Block 0 alog Block 0 AND AN7 Figure 19 2 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 154 Chapter 19 Analog Inputs Click close the Target s properties and click again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project The analog inputs can now be utilized from the ladder diagram project EZ LADDER Toolkit automatically creates variables that represent the analog inputs They are o labeled ANO through AN7 for analog input 1 through analog input 8 respectively Using Analog Inputs in the Ladder Diagram Project With the hardware target selected and analog inputs installed if required it is now simple to use these ana log input readings in the ladder diagram project For each analog input
304. the default location for installing the EZ LADDER Toolkit or browse and select a different location Click NEXT 6 All the information is gathered Click iNsTALL to install the EZ LADDER Toolkit The EZ LADDER installer will copy all the required files and create a shortcut 7 When installation is complete click FINISH Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual EZ EZ Ladder Toolkit 1 1 0 0 Setup mcam od Registration Information Please enter your information Serial Number 000 0001 001 License File C Program Files x86 Divelbiss Corporation EZ Ladder Toolkit s 9S EZ EZ Ladder Toolkit 1 1 0 0 Setup Lo Choose Install Location Choose the folder in which to install EZ Ladder Toolkit 1 1 0 0 Setup will install EZ Ladder Toolkit 1 1 0 0 in the following folder To install in a different folder click Browse and select another folder Click Next to continue poration EZ Ladder Toolkit 1 1 0 0 Space required 235 8MB Space available 742 8GB Nullsoft Install System v2 46 EZ EZ Ladder Toolkit 1 1 0 0 Setup ee bo Choose Start Menu Folder Choose a Start Menu folder for the EZ Ladder Toolkit 1 1 0 0 shortcuts Select the Start Menu folder in which you would like to create the program s shortcuts You can also enter a name to create a new folder Administrative Tools Adobe Adobe Design Premium C54 Chapter 1 Getting
305. the drop down menu and select the general purpose output pin GPO that will serve as this device s chip select CS With these two devices selected additional channel information will be available to configure See Figure 15 8 The ADS 7841 supports up to 4 A D channels Using the provided check box select the actual channels that will be used in the ladder diagram project For each enabled channel a default Variable Name is automati cally created This name may be changed in the variable name box at this time See Figure 15 8 These variable names will be the variables in the ladder diagram that will hold the current analog input values read from the ADS7841 When the program runs the device is automatically queried and the analog input readings are stored in these variables Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 126 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support a ADS7841 Device Properties SPI SPI0 Channels Iv Enabled CH1 Enabled CH2 Enabled CH3 Enabled Figure 15 8 Click close the ADS7841 Device Properties click to close the ADS7841 Properties and click to close the PLC on a Chip target settings dialog and click ox again to close the Project Settings window Use the File Menu and Save the ladder diagram project With the device properly interface and connected to the target the analog input readi
306. the type is allowed to be modified then any changes made by the master to the register will immediately change the value of the variable that is assigned to that register and will be used in the ladder diagram project locally Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 97 Chapter 13 Modbus Networking Modbus Slave Communication Errors Modbus communications supports the use of error codes to identify and diagnose problems with the network and slaves These errors are reported on master only Typical error codes are 2 Illegal Data Address This identifies that the master attempted to access an invalid register 3 Illegal Data Value This identifies the master attempted to access a register that is valid but not used in the ladder diagram project on the slave unit The largest register number is kept automatically by EZ LADDER Toolkit in the ladder diagram project For more details regarding errors and error codes on a Modbus Network refer to the network Master s documentation Modbus Slave Supported Master Functions EZ LADDER Toolkits Modbus Slave supports eight standard Modbus master functions functions the master can use to access and update slave registers While there is no way for the ladder diagram or EZ LADDER to use these functions they are noted for reference Supported Functions include 1 Read Coil Status 2 Read Discrete Input Status 3 Read Holding Registers 4 Read Input Regi
307. to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Hardware Counter CNTRTMR Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_ TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER 2 Hardware Counter Inputs 7 Analog Inputs Retentive Variables Expandable using Option Boards 4 Channels Type K Thermocouple Option Bds Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect R_TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Set Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 203 CHAPTER 21 Low Power Mode This chapter provides basic information on installing and using the Low Power Mode feature in PLC on a Chip and PLC on a Chip based controllers must be supported by target Chapter Contents Low Power Mode Overview 205 Low P
308. to Integer INTEGER J1939 Receive 1939 SPN Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Optional Multipurpose Serial Port Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT OptiCAN Node Status OPTICAN NODESTATUS OptiCAN Transmit Message OPTICAN TXNET MSG Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 182 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets HEC 410X E R Features OptiCAN Networking EEPROM Storage 0 20mA Analog Inputs x 4 12 bit 4 PWM Capable Outputs x 4 Output Current Feedback PWM Modbus Slave Hardware Counters 2 Channels J1939 Communications Serial Printing Retentive Variables Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM_READ EEPROM Write EEPROM_WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack PACK
309. to an real output O The enable EN must be true for the REAL function to be enabled The Q output is true when the REAL function is enabled In addition to converting a Boolean Timer or Integer to an real the REAL function block can be used to copy one real to another Input Output Connections The REAL function block placement requires connections of two input pins EN P and two output pins Q worm Type Integer Sean Timer Active State Other Dotais E ma TT X o o Ce ow X X X X L9 o o po gp gj o owt jJ X Jo ooo Example Circuit Related Functions TIMER BOOLEAN INTEGER Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 215 Chapter 22 Function Reference R TRIG R TRIG Description CLK The R TRIG is a function that may be used to trigger another function on the rising edge of a transition When the CLK detects a false to true transition the output Q is energized for one scan of the program only Input Output Connections The R_TRIG function block placement requires connections of one input pin CLK and one output pin Q worm Type Integer Real Boolean Timer Active State Other Details Lak ma wu X Example Circuit CHI INTEGER Timing Diagram Program Scan Tinje Related Functions F TRIG Divelbiss Corporation
310. to the DIRECT COIL The UNLATCH coil will clear its latched counterpart LATCH coil with same name This will cause the LATCH coil to de energize LATCH and UNLATCH coils work as pairs Any bool ean variable can be used as a LATCH UNLATCH coil Example Circuit CR CHI L CHI Related Functions LATCH DIRECT COIL INVERTED COIL Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 296 Chapter 22 Function Reference XOR XOR Description EN Q The XOR functions provides a bitwise exclusive OR function of the P1 and P2 inputs The enable EN must be true for the XOR function to be enabled The Q output is true when the XOR function is enabled P1 0 Input Output Connections The XOR function block placement requires connections of 3 input pins EN P1 P2 and P two output pins Q O Pin Active State Other Details S x CX D LC Example Circuit Related Functions OR AND NOT 9 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 297 DIVELBISS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This Software License Agreement the Agreement sets forth the terms by which Divelbiss Corporation an Ohio corporation hav ing a principal place of business at 9778 Mt Gilead Road Fredericktown Ohio Divelbiss authorizes its bona fide licensees who have paid all applicable fees and accepted the terms of this Agreement each a Li
311. to the Windows clipboard Paste The Paste menu item is disabled in the EZ LADDER Toolkit To paste an object or multiple objects position the mouse at the starting point to paste right click the mouse and select paste This will paste the Windows clipboard contents into the ladder diagram project When pasting objects and rungs enough space must be available at the pasting point for the Windows clipboard contents The paste will not complete unless sufficient space is provided of rungs and space on each rung Select All The Select All menu item is disabled in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Settings The Settings menu item opens the LD ladder diagram settings window This window allows general setting to be configured such as displaying grid fonts etc Typically it is recommended to leave the settings at the factory defaults Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 16 Chapter 2 Navigating EZ LADDER Toolkit VIEW MENU The VIEW Menu is used to view currently selected target information and to view or hide tool bars and op tional windows Target Information The target information window provides details of the selected hardware target selected in the Projects Settings menu including target name minimum kernel version required for this version of EZ LADDER Toolkit Supported Objects and Functions Analog I O and Digital I O The target information may be printed using the provided PRINT button Basic
312. tus register 191 EN for the specified node over the OptiCAN network When placing the function the NODE ID is specified as well as the Timeout The function block will isten for the node status register broadcast of the Node ID and update VAL and Q accordingly The Timeout value is the duration that the function block will isten and not receive a status prior generating an Error on the VAL output pin and the Q output The Q output is true when the VAL output is valid See Chapter 14 OptiCAN Network ing for more information regarding using the function block and general OptiCAN networking OPTICAN NODESTATUS VAL Input Output Connections The OPTICAN NODESTATUS function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and two output pins Q VAL wor type integer Rest Boolean Timer Active State Oterbetals E ma _ o om X 1 ef owe Example Circuit MODEST H2 CRI EN Q VAL Error Codes The Node Status register 191 is represented by a 32 bit number The lower 16 bits represents the current status code while the upper 16 bits represents the error code There are three status codes supported on the OptiCAN network The status codes are 1 Reset 2 Ac tive and 4 Reset The output will be true if the VAL output is valid If invalid no response from node then the output will be false and the VAL output
313. tus register set if counter wraps positive carry Using the LS7366R in the Ladder Diagram Project To gain the functionality of the SPI LS7366R counter integrated circuit you must use the CNTR LS7366R function block This function block has multiple inputs and outputs These inputs and outputs can function in different modes based on the configuration of the actual LS7366R in the ladder diagram projects It is important to reference the LS7366R data sheet for operation modes and to understand registers A thorough understanding of the LS7366R is required to properly configure and use the device correctly For details on the use of the 157366 function block refer to Chapter 22 Function Reference Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 136 Chapter 15 SPI Devices and Support CHI ITR_LS 366 State CRA Direction CR3 Figure 15 17 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 137 CHAPTER 16 SSI Encoder This chapter provides basic information to understand how to install configure and use the SSI Encoder in the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents Synchronous Serial Interface SSI Encoder Input 139 Slave SSI Encoder 141 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 16 SSI Encoder Synchro
314. ty after being notified thereof or informed of steps or modifications that would have avoided the alleged infringement or vi used by Licensee in violation of the terms of this Agreement Licensee will defend indemnify and hold Divelbiss harmless from and against any and all losses liabilities judgments damages and claims against Divelbiss obtained or asserted by any third party including any allegation of infringement or violation of proprietary rights and all related costs including attorney fees incurred by Divelbiss arising or resulting from or related to i Licensee s use modification or adaptation of the Licensed Software including to create any application or any Resulting Product ii the operation or performance or Licensee s or any third party s use of any Resulting Product iii any breach by Licensee of any representation or warranty made by Licensee related to the Licensed Software or any Resulting Product or iv any breach by Licensee of any of its obligations under this Agreement In the event that any claim of infringement under Section 8 a above is or in Divelbiss s sole judgment is likely to be substantiated Divelbiss may at its sole discretion use commercially reasonable efforts to i obtain a license from the third party for Licensee to continue using the allegedly infringing feature or aspect of the EZ LADDER Toolkit ii replace or modify the allegedly infringing feature or aspect of the EZ LADDER Toolkit to a
315. ultiple new devices they will all be assigned the same 255 Node ID The controller can differentiate between devices that have not been configured using their serial number The serial number is programmed at the factory and is not user changeable Only non controller device Node IDs may be configured using this tool Controller Node IDs are only O changeable in the actual ladder diagram project loaded on the controller Divelbiss Configuration Tool ID Serial Humber 4 1000 Harsh Environment Controller 07240004 255 1100 Harsh Environment Digital 07240006 Configure JS connected 0 Figure 14 16 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 114 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking To Configure a Node To configure a node select th e node highlight in the list and click the coNricuRE Nope button The Node Configuration dialog box will open See Figure 14 17 The following can be viewed from the Node Configu ration dialog Some may be configured while others may not Node ID Type Serial Number Broadcast Interval This is where the node ID number is set This is the description of the device cannot be edited This is the serial number of the device programmed at factory and cannot be edited This is the interval rate at which the registers will be broadcast on the net work Node 255 Configuration Made ID 255
316. umber must be a user defined register 0 127 Click the IN check box This identifies that this variable will be listening not broadcasting The Broadcast Trigger drop down is no longer available Click to close the dialog and click to close the Add Edit Vari able dialog a Edit Address Register 0 1 Register Number Broadcast Trigger 1 Address Register _1 11 14 Figure 14 12 0 Leaving the node ID blank while is allowable is not a valid address no data will be received When this ladder diagram project is running if a broadcast from node ID 11 register 4 is seen on the net work it will be heard and the register variable on this controller will be updated Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 111 Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking Determining Node Status As discussed earlier in this chapter that a Start Network command must be transmitted to start the network communicating and that it should happen on start up In addition it was recommended to monitor nodes status and possible resent the Start Network command in the event of a communications loss to a node To determine the status of a specific node the OPTICAN NODESTATUS function block is used Using the OPTICAN NODESTATUS function block is a two step process When placing the function block the Opti CAN Node Status Properties dialog box will open See Figure 14 13 In the Node ID
317. urn to the Add Edit Variable dialog box The register address is transferred to the text box automatically Click to save the variable The register is now assigned to a variable An SPI Slave register address may be directly typed into the Address Register box without using the button SPI Slave Register Assignments SPI Register Beginning Address 0x0000 SPI Register Ending Address OxO1FF Registers 32 Bits Each Total of Registers 512 Naming SPI regnum Communications Protocol Read Write Bit The high order bit selects Read 0 Write 1 Control Word 16 Bit Control Word 32 bit data Data Shift Shifts most significant byte first Chip Select Chip select to stay low for byte transfer and MUST go high after each byte for at least 1 2 of the clock cycle Clock Frequency Minimum is 10KHz Maximum is 15KHz Read Write Delay A 1mS delay is required between read and write transfers This allows time for everything to stabilize and reset after each action Read Command amp Data 50 5 delay is required between sending the read command and Read Delay actually reading the data Read Writing Sequential 50uS delay is required between reading and writing sequential data Delay If there is more than 1 millisecond between bytes then the command is reset and the current byte is treated as the first byte of a new command Write Master W In lt o o
318. us Serial Printing Retentive Variables Supported Function Blocks Less Than lt Less Than Equal To lt Not Equal To lt gt Equal To EEPROM Read EEPROM READ EEPROM Write EEPROM WRITE Greater Than gt Greater Than Equal To gt Grey Scale Encoder GC SSI Absolute Value ABS Addition ADD Bitwise AND AND Average AVG Bit Pack BIT PACK Bit Unpack BIT UNPACK Convert to Boolean BOOLEAN Compare CMP Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Up Down CTUD Division DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Latching Coil LATCH Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Optional Multipurpose Serial Port EEPROM Storage Modbus Slave Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL Serial Printing SERIAL PRINT oet Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit U
319. utton is clicked The Status window typically will change to Waiting to identify that the connec tion is complete and the hardware target is waiting for a ladder diagram project to be downloaded Figure 6 3 illustrates the status as described T pan _ _ _ Status Waiting J Program Name E Program Version EN Build Number EN Scan Time ms J Figure 6 3 When Target has Different Project Loaded If the ladder diagram project name of the project open in EZ LADDER Toolkit does not match the name of the ladder diagram project that is loaded on the target the warning dialog in Figure 6 4 is displayed Click ok to clear this warning This warning can be caused because the projects differ or the project open in EZ LADDER Toolkit was renamed or saved with a different name using the Save As since it was loaded on the target EZ LADDER t A different program is running Figure 6 4 When Target has the Same Project If the ladder diagram project name of the project open in EZ LADDER Toolkit does match the name of the ladder diagram project that is loaded on the target two results can occur If the build number that automatic number that increments each time a project is compiled See Chapter 4 Configuring Targets is the same as the build number of the project loaded on the target no dialog boxes are displayed The Status Program Name Program Version Build Number and Scan Time are updated Now ladder diagram p
320. vision DIV Drum Sequencer DRUM SEQ Falling Edge Detect F_TRIG Get Date GETDATE Get Time GETTIME High Speed Timer HIGH SPD TMR Hysteresis HYSTER Convert to Integer INTEGER Keypad KEYPAD Latching Coil LATCH LCD Clear LCD CLEAR LCD Print LCD PRINT Limit LIMIT Moving Average MAVG Maximum MAX Minimum MIN Modulo MOD Multiplication MULT Bitwise NOT NOT Bitwise OR OR Pulse With Modulation PWM PWM Frequency PWM FREQ Rising Edge Detect TRIG Convert to Real REAL Rotate Left ROL Rotate Right ROR Reset Set Reset Dominant RS Select SEL oet Date SETDATE Set Time SETTIME Shift Left SHL Shift Right SHR Serial Print SERIAL PRINT Set Reset Set Dominant SR Subtraction SUB Convert to Timer TIMER Time Delay Off TOF Time Delay On TON Pulse Timer TP Unlatching Coil UNLATCH Bitwise XOR XOR Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 162 Chapter 20 Hardware Targets PLCHIP M2 2562X PLCHIP M2 2563X All listed features and function blocks listed are supported individually Using certain features or function blocks may limit the availability of other features and function blocks Features Analog Inputs 8 Channels PWM Outputs ADS8341 A D SPI Real Time Clock 051305 SPI SPI Slave DAC7612 D A SPI Hardware Counter Synchronous Serial Interface SSI LS7366R CNTR SPI HDIO Bus Serial Printing J1939 C
321. void such infringement or iii terminate this Agreement and the license hereunder and refund a prorated portion of the initial license fee paid by Licensee for the allegedly infringing feature or aspect of the EZ LADDER Toolkit 9 Modification of Licensed Software a Divelbiss may from time to time at its sole discretion and without further notice to Licensee make and at its further discretion distribute to Licensee modifications to the Licensed Software In the event that Licensee fails to install such a modification when so advised by Divelbiss Divelbiss shall be relieved of any obligation pursuant to the limited warranty set forth in Section 5 hereof Should Licensee request modifications to the Licensed Software Divelbiss may charge for and make such changes subject to the terms of a separate agreement between the parties Licensee may not modify the Licensed Software or engage any third party to modify the Licensed Software without the express written consent of Divelbiss Any and all modifications made to the Licensed Software whether by Licensee or any third party and all rights therein are hereby assigned to and shall be the sole and exclusive property of Divelbiss 10 Ownership of Licensed Software a Licensee acknowledges that subject only to the license specifically granted herein all right title and interest in and to the Licensed Software all revisions and copies thereof provided to or created by Licensee and a
322. w Refer to Figure 8 2 for item identification 1 8 16 bit Resolution The first choice should be selecting if 8 bits or 16 bits of PWM resolution are required for the application Select the appropriate resolution 8 bit resolution supports up to 8 total channels while 16 bit resolution supports up to 4 total channels the number of channels and features are always target dependent Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 70 Chapter 8 Pulse Width Modulation 2 Add Button The app button opens a select dialog that allows the selection and installation of the PWM channels To select multiple channels hold the cTRL key when selecting them Only target supported channels will be displayed Channels are also limited by PWM resolution 3 Remove Button Highlighting a channel and clicking the Remove button EZ LADDER Toolkit will remove the PWM channel 4 Min Frequency As PWM outputs are target specific each may have different PWM specifications When a channel is installed and highlighted these fields will display the limitations of the actual target The Max and Min frequency can change based on the PWM resolution selected 5 Desired Frequency The desired frequency for the PWM channel is entered here Not all frequencies are attainable based on the target 6 Actual Frequency The actual attainable frequency closest to the desired frequency is shown This frequency will be used
323. will be equal to the value of the input of the PWM FREQ function block thus allowing real time frequency changes CHI M FHEG F Figure 8 4 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 2 CHAPTER 9 LCD Display Support This chapter provides basic information to understand how to install configure and use an LCD Display with the EZ LADDER Toolkit Chapter Contents LCD Display Functionality 74 Configuring the LCD Display in the Project Settings 74 Displaying Messages on the LCD Display 76 Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual Chapter 9 LCD Display Support LCD Display Functionality EZ LADDER Toolkit provides the ability to display text and variables using it s built in LCD support EZ LADDER Toolkit supports three different LCD Liquid Crystal Display displays Using one of these displays and the EZ LADDER Toolkit function blocks messages may be displayed variables displayed and in con junction with the keypad feature menus may be created LCD support is based on actual hardware target specifications PLC on a Chip Integrated Circuits and Modules support LCD display functionality For PLCs and controllers refer to the supported features See Chapter 20 Hardware Targets These are the three LCD displays currently supported 2x20 2 Row 20
324. will equal zero Error codes are divided into two groups Device specific errors are numbered 0 32767 while common error codes are numbered 32768 65535 Common Error Codes are as follows 65535 CAN Controller Receive Error 65531 CAN Controller Bus Off State 65534 CAN Controller Receive Warning 65530 CAN Controller Data Overrun 65533 CAN Controller Transmit Error 65519 OptiCAN Heartbeat Timeout 65532 CAN Controller Transmit Warning 65518 CAN Controller Error Related Functions OPTICAN TXNETMSG Divelbiss Corporation M Series EZ LADDER Toolkit User Manual 268 Chapter 22 Function Reference OPTICAN TXNETMSG OPTICAN TXNETMSG Description The OPTICAN TXNETMSG function broadcasts the network control commands EN Q Start Network Stop Network and Reset Network on the OptiCAN network This function block globally broadcasts therefore affecting all connected nodes A Start Network command must be broadcast after power up to start the OptiCAN network nodes communications When placing the function a dialog box provides the selection of the type of com mand to send and an optional description box See Chapter 14 OptiCAN Networking for more information regarding using the function block and general OptiCAN networking Input Output Connections The OPTICAN TXNETMSG function block placement requires connections of one input pin EN and one output pin Q ow o ox 0 ome 1

USER MANUAL - Divelbiss Corporation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents